Sunteți pe pagina 1din 242

FANUC

FANUC
FANUC
FANUC
FANUC
FANUC

ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL
ROBODRILL

@-D14M+A5
@-D14L+A5
@-D14S+A5
@-D21M+A5
@-D21L+A5
@-D21S+A5

CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

WARNING
To use the products explained herein safely, read carefully and understand
completely all the descriptions about safety at the beginning of this manual
and those about the functions you are going to use. Failing to follow any
safety precaution or any direction described herein may lead to death or
injury. Always keep this manual near your product, so you can reference
it whenever necessary.

B-85314EN-1/01

WARNING
Before starting to install, operate, or maintain the product, carefully read and
understand the "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS." Failing to follow any of these safety
precautions and other cautions stated herein may lead to death or injury.
The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is:
Product name

Abbreviation

FANUC ROBODRILL -D14 (M,L,S) i A5

-D14 i A5

FANUC ROBODRILL -D21 (M,L, S) i A5


Controller: A04B-0102- B201, B301, B302
FANUC Series 31i-B5
Mechanical Unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113
A04B-0102- B101,B102, B103, B104, B105, B106,
B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116

-D21 i A5

To help prevent accidents that may occur due to incorrect handling, this operator's manual indicates
cautions with marks. The meaning of each mark is explained below. Before starting to read the text of
the cautions, be sure to understand the meaning of the corresponding marks.
Indicates that incorrect handling will invite an imminent danger of death or
DANGER:
serious injury.

WARNING:

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to death or serious injury.

CAUTION:

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to light or moderate injury.

CAUTION:
ATTENTION:
SUPPLEMENT:

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to damage not only to the product
of interest but also to other properties.
Describes precautions for protecting the product of interest from damage.
Describes information for effective and efficient use of the product of interest.

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.


All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and Foreign
Trade Law. The export of -D14MiA5/D14LiA5/D14SiA5, -D21MiA5/D21LiA5/D21SiA5
from Japan is subject to an export license by the government of Japan. Other models in this
manual may also be subject to export controls. Further, re-export to another country may be
subject to the license of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported.
Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States
government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC
for advice.
In this manual, we have tried to describe as many matters as possible.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially
described as possible in this manual should be regarded as "impossible." If you wander
whether a specific matter is possible, ask FANUC.

PREFACE

B-85314EN-1/01

PREFACE

PURPOSES OF THE MACHINE


The FANUC ROBODRILL -DiA5 series is a machine tool that operates under control of a CNC
(computer numerical control unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, light milling, milling, and boring.
It should not be used for any other purposes.

DEFINITION OF USERS

2.1

Operators

In this manual, the term operator refers to a person who operates the machine.
The operator must read this manual and become familiar with its contents. If the operator operates the
machine without becoming familiar with its contents, the operator and the people around the machine
may be in serious danger.
The operator is not allowed to carry out maintenance work that involves:
(1) Removal of a cover that requires a tool for its removal (fixed cover)
(2) Installation and movement of the machine

2.2

Daily Maintenance and Preventive Maintenance Personnel

These personnel must have completed ROBODRILL course at the Robomachine Department at the
FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge and must also be qualified by the company or
organization to which they belong.
Daily maintenance and preventive maintenance personnel must observe the "Cautions on Maintenance,"
described below.
Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must
observe during maintenance

p-1

PREFACE

2.3

B-85314EN-1/01

WARNING
Before removing a cover for maintenance purposes, be sure to set the control
unit cabinet door circuit breaker for the machine to its off position. Otherwise, an
unexpected behavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock.
Before switching on the power with a cover removed for maintenance purposes,
make sure that no one is beside the machine. Otherwise, an unexpected
behavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock.
Before starting maintenance work, post a notice near the control unit cabinet
door circuit breaker to indicate that no one except the worker of interest is
allowed to switch on the power.
Before switching on the power and operating the machine during or after
maintenance work, make sure that no tool or the like is left in the machine.
Otherwise, when the machine runs, it may strike the tool or the like toward
people around the machine.
When making electrical adjustments with a cover removed, use a tool with a
sufficient electrical protection (for example, a screwdriver made of plastic).
Otherwise, there is a risk of an electrical shock.
After maintenance work, make sure that all components, including screws, that
were removed for maintenance purposes are back in place. Otherwise, safety
devices may fail to function, or injury may occur, because of a malfunction or
electric shock.
When replacing maintenance parts, be sure to keep the control unit cabinet door
circuit breaker set to its off position. Otherwise, there may occur damage to the
maintenance parts or an electrical shock.
The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance shall
not be engaged in replacement of the CNC memory backup battery or
fluorescent lamps within the machine. Only the maintenance engineer is
allowed to replace such electrical components. Work by any person with no
sufficient knowledge may disable safety devices from working, resulting in an
unexpected behavior of the machine that may cause injury or an electric shock.
Be sure to close and lock the control unit cabinet door upon completion of
maintenance work to prevent fluid such as coolant or chippings from entering the
unit. Similarly, be sure to close the covers of the operator's panel and cable duct
and securely tighten the mounting screws of the covers.

Maintenance Personnel

These personnel must have sufficient knowledge of machinery or electricity to perform maintenance
properly, must have completed a maintenance course at the FA or Robomachine Department of the
FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge, and must also be qualified by the company or
organization to which they belong.
Maintenance personnel perform work including:
(1) Installation and movement of the machine
(2) Repair of the machine (replacement of mechanical units and replacement of electric components that
require setup and adjustment after being replaced)
Maintenance personnel must observe the "Caution on Maintenance," described above. Experienced
maintenance personnel, in particular, should avoid accidents due to carelessness or overconfidence.
p-2

PREFACE

B-85314EN-1/01

ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL


This manual covers the following models:
Model name
FANUC ROBODRILL -D14 (M,L,S) i A5
FANUC ROBODRILL -D21 (M,L,S) i A5
Control unit:
A04B-0102-B201, B301, B302
FANUC Series 31i-B5
Mechanical unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113
A04B-0102-B101, B102, B103, B104, B105, B106,
B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116

Abbreviation
-D14 i A5
-D21 i A5

The manuals for this machine include the following:


(1) FANUC ROBODRILL -D14iA5/D21iA5 Series OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN):
Describes how to use and maintain this machine.
(2) FANUC ROBODRILL -D14iA5/D21iA5 Series CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION OPERATOR'S
MANUAL (B-85314EN-1): This manual. Describes how to operate the custom PMC function, as
well as programming.
(3) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64484EN): Describes how to operate
numerical control (NC) units and how to create programs.
(4) FANUC ROBODRILL -D14iA5/D21iA5 Series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN):
Describes alarms, how to perform troubleshooting, and how to replace parts.
(5) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64485EN): Describes how to
perform troubleshooting and adjustment on numerical control (NC) units.
Before using this machine, read the necessary parts of manual (1).
For daily handling and for reference, use manuals (1) and (3).
Use manuals (4) and (5) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, and adjustment of machine sections.
Descriptions in manuals (1), (2), and (4) have priority over those in manuals (3) and (5). In you find any
contradiction, assume that the description in manuals (1), (2), and (4) applies.

This manual contains minimum requirements for using the custom PMC function.
If you require more detailed explanation, see the following manual:
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B, Series
35i-MODEL B
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513EN)

p-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-85314EN-1/01

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1

OUTLINE ................................................................................................. 1

EXPLANATION OF TERMS.................................................................... 3

NOTES .................................................................................................... 4

SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 5

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 6


5.1
5.2

STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS......................................... 6


OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 10
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3

I/O Unit Model-A...................................................................................................10


I/O Link Connection Unit.......................................................................................22
Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel ........................................................22

5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6

Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)..........................................37


Optional I/O Module Connection...........................................................................46
Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used.....................................46

5.2.3.1

Terminal Module B............................................................................................ 29

ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC.................................... 47

INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS ......................................... 48

EDITING ................................................................................................ 50
8.1
8.2

STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ............................................................ 50


EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS................................................................. 51
8.2.1
8.2.2

8.3
8.4
8.5

Switching to the Edit Screen ..................................................................................51


Editing Ladder Programs........................................................................................53

EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES ...................................... 65


EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ..................................................... 68
ENDING AN EDITING SESSION ................................................................ 70

CONFIRMATION................................................................................... 71
9.1
9.2

DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS ..................................... 71


SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS................................................................................... 73

10 SETTING PMC PARAMETERS ............................................................ 74


11 INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA .......................................................... 78
11.1
11.2

OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN...................................... 78


OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN ...................................................... 81

12 INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER


PROGRAMS.......................................................................................... 84
12.1
12.2
12.3

BASIC SIGNALS ....................................................................................... 105


MACHINE STATUS ................................................................................... 105
FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL .................................................. 106
c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
12.10
12.11
12.12
12.13
12.14
12.15
12.16
12.17
12.18
12.19
12.20
12.21
12.22
12.23
12.24
12.25
12.26
12.27
12.28
12.29
12.30
12.31
12.32
12.33
12.34
12.35

B-85314EN-1/01

EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION ..................... 108


EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION......................... 110
EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..................................... 113
M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89) ......................................... 116
INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION (OPTION)................. 117
RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION ........................................................... 117
ALARM OUTPUT 2.................................................................................... 117
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT...................................................................... 118
ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL .................................................... 120
OPERATOR'S PANEL............................................................................... 121
OPERATION MODE SWITCHING ............................................................ 122
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT ................................................................ 123
MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ................................................................... 124
COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT, CENTER
THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW .................................................. 125
COMPLETION OF MACHINING................................................................ 125
FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL ............................................................. 126
AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL ...................................................... 126
AI TOOL MONITOR................................................................................... 127
SPINDLE ................................................................................................... 127
SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 128
POSITION SWITCH .................................................................................. 128
CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS ......................................... 129
CUSTOM MACROS .................................................................................. 130
M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ................................................................ 131
OPERATION CONTROL ........................................................................... 131
ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY ...................................... 132
MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP ..................................................................... 132
POWER-OFF............................................................................................. 132
OVERRIDE CONTROL ............................................................................. 133
ROBOT INTERFACE................................................................................. 134
Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item ..................................... 136
BLOCK SKIP ............................................................................................. 136

13 USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ............................. 137


14 SETTING PARAMETERS ................................................................... 143
15 ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST ........................................... 144
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4

Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen .................. 144
PMC System Alarm Messages .................................................................. 152
Operation Errors ........................................................................................ 157
I/O Communication Error Messages.......................................................... 172

APPENDIX
A

CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III ......................... 181


A.1

CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................................................ 182


c-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B-85314EN-1/01

A.2

LADDER PROGRAM EDITING ................................................................. 185


A.2.1
A.2.2
A.2.3
A.2.4
A.2.5
A.2.6

A.3
A.4
A.5

LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE CREATION . 190


CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION............................................. 193
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES .................................... 205
A.5.1

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 209


SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT ...... 213
SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 214
OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND MODIFYING
THE VALUES OF SIGNALS ...................................................................... 215

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE


............................................................................................................. 218
C.1
C.2

Ladder Program Message Editing ........................................................................205

FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION............................................... 209


B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4

Title Editing..........................................................................................................185
Ladder Editing......................................................................................................186
Symbol and Comment Editing .............................................................................187
Message Editing ...................................................................................................188
I/O Module Editing ..............................................................................................189
System Parameter Editing ....................................................................................189

OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 218


SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................ 218

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ........................................ 220


D.1
D.2
D.3

CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY.......... 221


CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF THE LADDER
PROGRAM ................................................................................................ 223
CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA.............................................................. 225
D.3.1
D.3.2

D.4
D.5

Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display.......................................225


Converting the Ladder Program ...........................................................................226

INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO THE CNC... 227


CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A MNEMONIC
FORMAT FILE ........................................................................................... 227

c-3

1.OUTLINE

B-85314EN-1/01

OUTLINE

The custom PMC function allows customers to create sequence programs on their own. The features of
the function include:
(1) Does not require hardware. (Low cost and increased maintainability)

The sequence program controller is built into the machine and, therefore, does not require any
installation space, unlike in conventional systems.

Interfacing with ROBODRILL is at the software level and, therefore, does not require any
signal lines, unlike in conventional systems. You can easily perform more advanced control by
using a variety of interface signals.

You can control external devices by using the terminal block for the ROBODRILL installed as
standard. (16 inputs and 16 outputs)
You can add more additional I/O signals, if required. (Optional)
(2) Variety of software functions

You can display your own alarm and operator messages on the ROBODRILL screen.

LEDs and other indicators for alarms are not required.

Full debugging functions are provided, such as the display of the operating status of created
ladder programs, signal diagnosis, and trace (which displays changes in signal states with the
passage of time).

Parameters such as variable timers and keep relays can be set on the screen.
ROBODRILL

ROBODRILL
Sequencer

System ladder
program

External device

Custom PMC

Conventional system using a commercially


available sequencer

External device

System using the custom PMC function

-1-

1.OUTLINE

B-85314EN-1/01

(3) Independent system ladder program (ROBODRILL controller: first PMC) and custom PMC (jig
controller: second PMC)

You can edit or input and output only custom PMC portions.

You can set any symbols and comments for all addresses. (The symbols and comments that
have been set are displayed when the second PMC is selected. However, they are not displayed
on the parameter and other screens that are common to the first and second PMCs.)

You can enable the display of alarms and messages simply by making message settings only
for the main body of a ladder program. (You can enable the display of the alarms and
messages without having to set message data (separate from the main body of the ladder
program) for the multi-language display function.)

ROBODRILL
System ladder
program

Independent data

Custom PMC

Custom PMC

Custom PMC

Ladder program
section

Ladder program
section

Message

Message

Without multi-language
display function

Can be input and


output individually

Message data for


multi-language display
function

With multi-language display


function

-2-

2.EXPLANATION OF TERMS

B-85314EN-1/01

EXPLANATION OF TERMS

Custom ladder program: Sequence program created by a customer to control jigs and so forth (second
PMC)
System ladder program: Sequence program prepared beforehand to exercise basic control on the
ROBODRILL (first PMC)
PMC:
Hardware system software for performing control, editing, and other
operations on custom and system ladder programs
Soft key:
Twelve buttons displayed at the bottom of the LCD panel
QUICK screen:
Application screen dedicated to ROBODRILL

-3-

3.NOTES

B-85314EN-1/01

NOTES

(1) Make sure that edited custom PMC (second PMC) ladder programs are attached to the machine. In
addition, supply those ladder programs to your FANUC sales or service person.
(2) Do not reference, or write to, addresses other than those specified.
(3) Do not edit the system ladder program (first PMC).
(4) When the I/O module allocation needs to be modified, be familiar with the specifications before
making any addition or change.
(5) Before installing edited custom PMC data in the machine, check the series and edition of the system
ladder program. If the interface signals for use with a newly added system ladder program are used,
the machine may not operate normally when the series and edition of the system ladder program
currently used is older.
(6) Do not use the following functional instructions:
END1 (SUB1), END2 (SUB2), END (SUB64), WINDR (SUB51), SPCNT (SUB46), WINDW
(SUB52), MMCWR (SUB98), MMCWW (SUB99), AXCTL (SUB53)
(7) Before pulling out and inserting a memory card, turn the power OFF.
(8) To use the custom PMC function, set the following PMC parameter bit. (See Chapter 10,
"SETTING PMC PARAMETERS.")
Parameter

Value

K15#7

1
0

Function
Makes the custom PMC function available.
Makes the custom PMC function unavailable.

where K: Keep relay, #7: Seventh bit


(9) The custom PMC function of the D14/21iA5 does not require the ladder edit card. Editing is always
permitted as long as the machine is in the emergency stop state. To disable custom PMC editing,
use the following PMC parameter bit.
Parameter

Value

K14#0

1
0

Function
Disables custom PMC editing.
Enables custom PMC editing.

(10) The M code used with a custom PMC function must always be the first M code.
(11) As ladder editing software for the personal computer, use FANUC LADDER-III Version 6.30 or
later.
(12) The maximum allowable custom PMC program size (flash ROM size) is 128 KB. Not only ladder
programs but also comments and messages consume the memory. Ensure that the maximum
allowable program size is not exceeded.

-4-

4.SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

SPECIFICATIONS
Programming language

Type of program
Number of instructions
Basic instruction processing time
Program size
Maximum allowable program size (Flash ROM size)
Number of usable subprograms
No. of inputs/ outputs
Inputs

Outputs

Internal relay
Message relay
Special auxiliary relay
Timer
Counter
Keep relay
Data table

Non-hold type

Variable
Fixed

Ladder program
Second PMC
14 basic instructions, 84 functional instructions
9.1 nsec /step
Approx. 16000 steps
128 KB
3500
16 as standard
(The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 48 by
adding terminal blocks.)
Up to 1024 inputs can be added as options.)
16 as standard
(The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 32 by
adding terminal blocks.)
Up to 1024 outputs can be added as options.)
1000 bytes (8000 points)
50 bytes (400 points)
100 points
80 points
140 points
30 points
10 bytes (80 points)
1000 bytes/8000 items (if used with an internal relay of the
hold type)

-5-

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

5
5.1

B-85314EN-1/01

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

You can use 16 inputs and 16 outputs of standard terminal block XT1.
You can add terminal blocks XTC1 (16 inputs and 16 outputs) and XTC2 (16 inputs) to expand the
number of inputs to up to 48 and that of outputs to up to 32.
To use these inputs and outputs, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.
EXT. INTERFACE, and set "1:FOR CUSTOM PMC" in the input/output signal setting field.
Refer to the "ROBODRILL -D14/21iA5 OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN)" for details.
Refer to the "ROBODRILL - D14/21iA5 SERIES MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN)" for the
specifications of the terminal blocks and connection cables.
Wiring PCB unit: A04B-0102-C210#STA

[DI01]

Terminal block [XTC1]

16 inputs (X0.0 to X1.7)


16 outputs (Y0.0 to Y1.7)

Terminal block [XTC2]

16 inputs (X2.0 to X3.7)

[DI02]

Terminal block [XT1] 16 inputs (X4.0 to X5.7)


16 outputs (Y4.0 to Y5.7)

-6-

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Connection diagram from connector panel PC board to 50-pin terminal block (XT1)
Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm
Name
UDI01
UDI02
UDI03
UDI04
UDI05
UDI06
UDI07
UDI08

Address
X 4.0
X 4.1
X 4.2
X 4.3
X 4.4
X 4.5
X 4.6
X 4.7

Signal
User DI01
User DI02
User DI03
User DI04
User DI05
User DI06
User DI07
User DI08

Destination
XT1-01
XT1-02
XT1-05
XT1-06
XT1-07
XT1-08
XT1-11
XT1-12

UDI09
UDI10
UDI11
UDI12
UDI13
UDI14
UDI15
UDI16

X 5.0
X 5.1
X 5.2
X 5.3
X 5.4
X 5.5
X 5.6
X 5.7

User DI09
User DI10
User DI11
User DI12
User DI13
User DI14
User DI15
User DI16

XT1-13
XT1-14
XT1-17
XT1-18
XT1-19
XT1-20
XT1-23
XT1-24

UDO01
UDO02
UDO03
UDO04
UDO05
UDO06
UDO07
UDO08

Y 2.0
Y 2.1
Y 2.2
Y 2.3
Y 2.4
Y 2.5
Y 2.6
Y 2.7

User DO01
User DO02
User DO03
User DO04
User DO05
User DO06
User DO07
User DO08

XT1-25
XT1-26
XT1-29
XT1-30
XT1-31
XT1-32
XT1-35
XT1-36

UDO09
UDO10
UDO11
UDO12
UDO13
UDO14
UDO15
UDO16

Y 3.0
Y 3.1
Y 3.2
Y 3.3
Y 3.4
Y 3.5
Y 3.6
Y 3.7

User DO09
User DO10
User DO11
User DO12
User DO13
User DO14
User DO15
User DO16

XT1-37
XT1-38
XT1-41
XT1-42
XT1-43
XT1-44
XT1-47
XT1-48

-7-

01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49

X 4.0
+24E
X 4.2
X 4.4
+24E
X 4.6
X 5.0
+24E
X 5.2
X 5.4
+24E
X 5.6
Y 2.0
0V
Y 2.2
Y 2.4
0V
Y 2.6
Y 3.0
0V
Y 3.2
Y 3.4
0V
Y 3.6
0V

02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50

X 4.1
+24E
X 4.3
X 4.5
+24E
X 4.7
X 5.1
+24E
X 5.3
X 5.5
+24E
X 5.7
Y 2.1
0V
Y 2.3
Y 2.5
0V
Y 2.7
Y 3.1
0V
Y 3.3
Y 3.5
0V
Y 3.7
+24E

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Connection diagram from DI01 to 50-pin terminal block (XTC1)


Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm
Name
UDI17
UDI18
UDI19
UDI20
UDI21
UDI22
UDI23
UDI24

Address
X0.0
X0.1
X0.2
X0.3
X0.4
X0.5
X0.6
X0.7

Signal
User DI17
User DI18
UserDI19
User DI20
User DI21
User DI22
User DI23
User DI24

Destination
XTC1-01
XTC1-02
XTC1-05
XTC1-06
XTC1-07
XTC1-08
XTC1-11
XTC1-12

UDI25
UDI26
UDI27
UDI28
UDI29
UDI30
UDI31
UDI32

X1.0
X1.1
X1.2
X1.3
X1.4
X1.5
X1.6
X1.7

User DI25
User DI26
User DI27
User DI28
User DI29
User DI30
User DI31
User DI32

XTC1-13
XTC1-14
XTC1-17
XTC1-18
XTC1-19
XTC1-20
XTC1-23
XTC1-24

UDO17
UDO18
UDO19
UDO20
UDO21
UDO22
UDO23
UDO24

Y0.0
Y0.1
Y0.2
Y0.3
Y0.4
Y0.5
Y0.6
Y0.7

User DO17
User DO18
User DO19
User DO20
User DO21
User DO22
User DO23
User DO24

XTC1-25
XTC1-26
XTC1-29
XTC1-30
XTC1-31
XTC1-32
XTC1-35
XTC1-36

UDO25
UDO26
UDO27
UDO28
UDO29
UDO30
UDO31
UDO32

Y1.0
Y1.1
Y1.2
Y1.3
Y1.4
Y1.5
Y1.6
Y1.7

User DO25
User DO26
User DO27
User DO28
User DO29
User DO30
User DO31
User DO32

XTC1-37
XTC1-38
XTC1-41
XTC1-42
XTC1-43
XTC1-44
XTC1-47
XTC1-48

-8-

01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49

X0.0
+24E
X0.2
X0.4
+24E
X0.6
X1.0
+24E
X1.2
X1.4
+24E
X1.6
Y0.0
0V
Y0.2
Y0.4
0V
Y0.6
Y1.0
0V
Y1.2
Y1.4
0V
Y1.6
0V

02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50

X0.1
+24E
X0.3
X0.5
+24E
X0.7
X1.1
+24E
X1.3
X1.5
+24E
X1.7
Y0.1
0V
Y0.3
Y0.5
0V
Y0.7
Y1.1
0V
Y1.3
Y1.5
0V
Y1.7
+24E

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Connection diagram from DI02 to 34-pin terminal block (XTC2)


Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm
Name
UDI33
UDI34
UDI35
UDI36
UDI37
UDI38
UDI39
UDI40

Address
X2.0
X2.1
X2.2
X2.3
X2.4
X2.5
X2.6
X2.7

Signal
User DI33
User DI34
User DI35
User DI36
User DI37
User DI38
User DI39
User DI40

Destination
XTC2-01
XTC2-02
XTC2-05
XTC2-06
XTC2-07
XTC2-08
XTC2-11
XTC2-12

UDI41
UDI42
UDI43
UDI44
UDI45
UDI46
UDI47
UDI48

X3.0
X3.1
X3.2
X3.3
X3.4
X3.5
X3.6
X3.7

User DI41
User DI42
User DI43
User DI44
User DI45
UserDI46
User DI47
User DI48

XTC2-13
XTC2-14
XTC2-17
XTC2-18
XTC2-19
XTC2-20
XTC2-23
XTC2-24

-9-

01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33

X2.0
+24E
X2.2
X2.4
+24E
X2.6
X3.0
+24E
X3.2
X3.4
+24E
X3.6
+24E
+24E
+24E
0V
0V

02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34

X2.1
+24E
X2.3
X2.5
+24E
X2.7
X3.1
+24E
X3.3
X3.5
+24E
X3.7
+24E
+24E
0V
0V
0V

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

5.2

OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

5.2.1

I/O Unit Model-A

By installing an I/O Unit Model-A, you can add up to 96 inputs and 64 outputs in the case of standard
setting.
The expansion section is in module units, so that you can select the modules that meet your specifications.
You can add up to five modules (two output modules and three input modules).
Vertical type
Interface module
Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with input modules

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slots 4 and 5: for use only with output modules

- 10 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Horizontal type

Input module

Name
AID16C

No. of
signals
16

Slots 4 and 5: for use only


with output modules

Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with


input modules

Interface module

Classificati
on

(Specifications of input/output modules)


Type
Voltage used
Common Shape of connection
Insulated, DC input

24 V d.c.

0V

Terminal block (M3.5)

AID16D

16

Insulated, DC input

24 V d.c.

24 V

Terminal block (M3.5)

AID32E1

32

Insulated, DC input

24 V d.c.

0/24 V

MR connector made by
HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO., LTD.

AID32E2

32

Insulated, DC input

24 V d.c.

0/24 V

Flat cable connector

Output

AOD08C

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

0V

Terminal block (M3.5)

module

AOD08D

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

24 V

Terminal block (M3.5)

AOD16C

16

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

0V

Terminal block (M3.5)

AOD16D

16

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

24 V

Terminal block (M3.5)

AOD32C1

32

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

0V

MR connector made by
HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO., LTD.

AOD32C2

32

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

0V

Flat cable connector

AOD32D1

32

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

24 V

MR connector made by
HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO CO., LTD.

AOD32D2

32

Insulated, DC output

12-24 V d.c.

24 V

AOR08G

Relay output

250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c.

Flat cable connector


Terminal block (M3.5)

AOR16G

16

Relay output

250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c.

Terminal block (M3.5)

In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used:


Signal classification

Expansion section slot


(see the above figure and the
figure on the previous page)

No. of signals

Signal address

Input signal
(up to 96 inputs)

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5

16, 32
16, 32
16, 32
8, 16, 32
8, 16, 32

X200.0 to X203.7
X204.0 to X207.7
X208.0 to X211.7
Y200.0 to Y203.7
Y204.0 to Y207.7

Output signal
(up to 64 outputs)

- 11 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

01

01
02

02
A0

03
04

A1

04

A2

05
06

A3

08

06

08

A6

09
10

10

B0

11
12

12

B2

13
14

14

B4

15
16

16

B6

17
18

18

19

B5
B6

17

B7

B3
B4

15

B5

B1
B2

13

B3

A7
B0

11

B1

A5
A6

09

A7

A3
A4

07

A5

A1
A2

05

A4

07

A0

03

B7

19
20

20

[AID16C]

[AID16D]

[Address allocation]
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

X 200.0
X 200.1
X 200.2
X 200.3
X 200.4
X 200.5
X 200.6
X 200.7

X 204.0
X 204.1
X 204.2
X 204.3
X 204.4
X 204.5
X 204.6
X 204.7

X 208.0
X 208.1
X 208.2
X 208.3
X 208.4
X 208.5
X 208.6
X 208.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

X 201.0
X 201.1
X 201.2
X 201.3
X 201.4
X 201.5
X 201.6
X 201.7

X 205.0
X 205.1
X 205.2
X 205.3
X 205.4
X 205.5
X 205.6
X 205.7

X 209.0
X 209.1
X 209.2
X 209.3
X 209.4
X 209.5
X 209.6
X 209.7

- 12 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01
50

41

49

40

16

07
A0

C0

32

24
A1

C1

48

39
A2

C2

15

06
A3

C3

31

23
A4

C4

47

38
A5

C5

30

22
A6

C6

46

37
A7

C7

45

36

29

21

12

03
B0

D0

28

20
B1

D1

44

35
B2

D2

11

02
B3

D3

27

19
B4

D4

43

34
B5

D5

10

01
B6

D6

42

33
B7

D7

[AID32E1]

[Address allocation]
Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

X 200.0
X 200.1
X 200.2
X 200.3
X 200.4
X 200.5
X 200.6
X 200.7

X 204.0
X 204.1
X 204.2
X 204.3
X 204.4
X 204.5
X 204.6
X 204.7

X 208.0
X 208.1
X 208.2
X 208.3
X 208.4
X 208.5
X 208.6
X 208.7

C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7

X 202.0
X 202.1
X 202.2
X 202.3
X 202.4
X 202.5
X 202.6
X 202.7

X 206.0
X 206.1
X 206.2
X 206.3
X 206.4
X 206.5
X 206.6
X 206.7

X 210.0
X 210.1
X 210.2
X 210.3
X 210.4
X 210.5
X 210.6
X 210.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

X 201.0
X 201.1
X 201.2
X 201.3
X 201.4
X 201.5
X 201.6
X 201.7

X 205.0
X 205.1
X 205.2
X 205.3
X 205.4
X 205.5
X 205.6
X 205.7

X 209.0
X 209.1
X 209.2
X 209.3
X 209.4
X 209.5
X 209.6
X 209.7

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

X 203.0
X 203.1
X 203.2
X 203.3
X 203.4
X 203.5
X 203.6
X 203.7

X 207.0
X 207.1
X 207.2
X 207.3
X 207.4
X 207.5
X 207.6
X 207.7

X 211.0
X 211.1
X 211.2
X 211.3
X 211.4
X 211.5
X 211.6
X 211.7

- 13 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

B24

B12

A24

A12

B23

B11
A0

C0

A23

A11
A1

C1

B22

B10
A2

C2

A22

A10
A3

C3

B21

B09
A4

C4

A21

A09
A5

C5

B20

B08
A6

C6

A20

A08
A7

C7

B18

B06

A18

A06

B17

B05
B0

D0

A17

A05
B1

D1

B16

B04
B2

D2

A16

A04
B3

D3

B15

B03
B4

D4

A15

A03
B5

D5

B14

B02
B6

D6

A14

A02
B7

D7

[AID32E2]

[Address allocation]
Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

X 200.0
X 200.1
X 200.2
X 200.3
X 200.4
X 200.5
X 200.6
X 200.7

X 204.0
X 204.1
X 204.2
X 204.3
X 204.4
X 204.5
X 204.6
X 204.7

X 208.0
X 208.1
X 208.2
X 208.3
X 208.4
X 208.5
X 208.6
X 208.7

C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7

X 202.0
X 202.1
X 202.2
X 202.3
X 202.4
X 202.5
X 202.6
X 202.7

X 206.0
X 206.1
X 206.2
X 206.3
X 206.4
X 206.5
X 206.6
X 206.7

X 210.0
X 210.1
X 210.2
X 210.3
X 210.4
X 210.5
X 210.6
X 210.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

X 201.0
X 201.1
X 201.2
X 201.3
X 201.4
X 201.5
X 201.6
X 201.7

X 205.0
X 205.1
X 205.2
X 205.3
X 205.4
X 205.5
X 205.6
X 205.7

X 209.0
X 209.1
X 209.2
X 209.3
X 209.4
X 209.5
X 209.6
X 209.7

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

X 203.0
X 203.1
X 203.2
X 203.3
X 203.4
X 203.5
X 203.6
X 203.7

X 207.0
X 207.1
X 207.2
X 207.3
X 207.4
X 207.5
X 207.6
X 207.7

X 211.0
X 211.1
X 211.2
X 211.3
X 211.4
X 211.5
X 211.6
X 211.7

- 14 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

01

01
02

02

03

03
04

LOAD

05

04
A0

LOAD

A1

LOAD

A2

LOAD

A3

LOAD

A4

LOAD

A5

LOAD

A6

LOAD

A7

LOAD

06
LOAD

07

06

09

08

11

10

13

12

15

14

17

16

19

18

20

A7

19
20

[AOD08C]

[AOD08D]

[Address allocation]
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

A6

17

18
LOAD

A5

15

16
LOAD

A4

13

14
LOAD

A3

11

12
LOAD

A2

09

10
LOAD

A1

07

08
LOAD

A0

05

Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

- 15 -

Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

01

01
02

LOAD

03

LOAD

LOAD

04
05

LOAD

LOAD

06
07

LOAD

LOAD

08
09

LOAD

10

02
A0

LOAD

A1

LOAD

A2

LOAD

A3

LOAD

A4

LOAD

A5

LOAD

A6

LOAD

A7

LOAD

11

04

06

LOAD

14
15

LOAD

LOAD

16
17

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

A3
A4

07
08

A5
A6

09
10

A7

11

13

LOAD

A1
A2

05

12
LOAD

A0

03

18
19
20

12
B0

LOAD

B1

LOAD

B2

LOAD

B3

LOAD

B4

LOAD

B5

LOAD

B6

LOAD

B7

LOAD

[AOD16C]

B0

13
14

B1
B2

15
16

B3
B4

17
18

B5
B6

19
20

B7

[AOD16D]

[Address allocation]
Slot 4
Slot 5
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7

Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

- 16 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01
50

08

49

07
A0

LOAD

LOAD

24
A1

LOAD

A2

LOAD

A3

LOAD

32
LOAD

A4

LOAD

A5

LOAD

A6

LOAD

C5
22

30

C6
37

A7

LOAD

C4
38

47
LOAD

C3
23

31
LOAD

C2
06

15
LOAD

C1
39

48
LOAD

C0

LOAD

16

C7

LOAD

46

40

50

41

13

04

12
LOAD

03
B0

LOAD

B1

LOAD

B2

LOAD

28
LOAD

44
LOAD

B3

LOAD

B4

LOAD

B5

D5

LOAD

01
B6

LOAD

B7

LOAD

42
LOAD

D4
34

10
LOAD

D3
19

43
LOAD

D2
02

27
LOAD

D1
35

11
LOAD

D0
20

D6
33
D7

29

21

45

36

[AOD32C1]

Slot 4

[Address allocation]
Slot 5

Slot 4

Slot 5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7

Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7

C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7

Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7

Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7

Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

- 17 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

B19

B07

B23

B11
A0

LOAD

A11
A1

LOAD

B10
A2

LOAD

A3

LOAD

A22
LOAD

A4

A09
A5

LOAD

A6

LOAD

C5
B08

A20

C6
A08

A7

LOAD

C4

LOAD

B20
LOAD

C3
B09

A21
LOAD

C2
A10

B21
LOAD

C1

LOAD

B22
LOAD

C0

LOAD

A23

C7

LOAD

A24

A12

B24

B12

B13

B01

B17

B05
B0

LOAD

A17
LOAD

A05
B1

LOAD

B2

LOAD

B16
LOAD

B3

LOAD

B4

LOAD

B5

LOAD

D5
B02

B6

LOAD

B7

LOAD

A14
LOAD

D4
A03

B14
LOAD

D3
B03

A15
LOAD

D2
A04

B15
LOAD

D1
B04

A16
LOAD

D0

LOAD

D6
A02
D7

A18

A06

B18

B06

[AOD32C2]

Slot 4

[Address allocation]
Slot 5

Slot 4

Slot 5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7

Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7

C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7

Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7

Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7

Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

- 18 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01
50

41

49

40

16
LOAD

07
A0

LOAD

A1

LOAD

A2

LOAD

32
LOAD

48
LOAD

A3

LOAD

A4

LOAD

A5

C5

LOAD

22
A6

LOAD

A7

LOAD

46
LOAD

C4
38

30
LOAD

C3
23

47
LOAD

C2
06

31
LOAD

C1
39

15
LOAD

C0
24

C6
37
C7

18

09

45

36

29

21

12

03
B0

LOAD

LOAD

20
B1

LOAD

B2

LOAD

B3

LOAD

44
LOAD

B4

LOAD

B5

LOAD

D5
01

B6

D6

LOAD

42

33
B7

LOAD

D4
34

10
LOAD

D3
19

43
LOAD

D2
02

27
LOAD

D1
35

11
LOAD

D0

LOAD

28

D7

LOAD

14

05

[AOD32D1]

Slot 4

[Address allocation]
Slot 5

Slot 4

Slot 5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7

Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7

C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7

Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7

Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7

Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

- 19 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

B24

B12

A24

A12

B23
LOAD

B11
A0

LOAD

A1

LOAD

A2

LOAD

A23
LOAD

B22
LOAD

A3

LOAD

A4

LOAD

A5

C5

LOAD

B08
A6

LOAD

A7

LOAD

A20
LOAD

C4
A09

B20
LOAD

C3
B09

A21
LOAD

C2
A10

B21
LOAD

C1
B10

A22
LOAD

C0
A11

C6
A08
C7

A19

A07

B18

B06

A18

A06

B17

B05
B0

LOAD

LOAD

A05
B1

LOAD

B2

LOAD

B3

LOAD

B16
LOAD

B4

LOAD

B5

LOAD

D5
B02

B6

D6

LOAD

A14

A02
B7

LOAD

D4
A03

B14
LOAD

D3
B03

A15
LOAD

D2
A04

B15
LOAD

D1
B04

A16
LOAD

D0

LOAD

A17

D7

LOAD

A13

A01

[AOD32D2]

Slot 4

[Address allocation]
Slot 5

Slot 4

Slot 5

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

Y 200.0
Y 200.1
Y 200.2
Y 200.3
Y 200.4
Y 200.5
Y 200.6
Y 200.7

Y 204.0
Y 204.1
Y 204.2
Y 204.3
Y 204.4
Y 204.5
Y 204.6
Y 204.7

C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7

Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7

Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Y 201.0
Y 201.1
Y 201.2
Y 201.3
Y 201.4
Y 201.5
Y 201.6
Y 201.7

Y 205.0
Y 205.1
Y 205.2
Y 205.3
Y 205.4
Y 205.5
Y 205.6
Y 205.7

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

- 20 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

01

01
V

02
V

03

LOAD

A1

A2

LOAD

LOAD

A3

LOAD

11

13

LOAD

LOAD

A5

17

A6

LOAD

19

09

A7
LOAD

20

A5
A6

10

A7

11
12
13

B0
B1

14
15

B2
B3

16
17

LOAD

18

A4
08

LOAD

16

A3

07

LOAD

LOAD

15

LOAD

A4
14

LOAD

LOAD

A2

06

12
V

05

LOAD

10

A0
A1

04

LOAD

08
09

03

LOAD

06
07

02

LOAD

LOAD

05

LOAD

A0
04

LOAD

LOAD

B4
18

19

B5
B6

20

B7

LOAD

[AOR08G]

[AOR16G]

AOR08G
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7

Slot 4
Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

AOR16G
Slot 5
Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

- 21 -

Slot 4
Y 202.0
Y 202.1
Y 202.2
Y 202.3
Y 202.4
Y 202.5
Y 202.6
Y 202.7

Slot 5
Y 206.0
Y 206.1
Y 206.2
Y 206.3
Y 206.4
Y 206.5
Y 206.6
Y 206.7

Y 203.0
Y 203.1
Y 203.2
Y 203.3
Y 203.4
Y 203.5
Y 203.6
Y 203.7

Y 207.0
Y 207.1
Y 207.2
Y 207.3
Y 207.4
Y 207.5
Y 207.6
Y 207.7

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

5.2.2

B-85314EN-1/01

I/O Link Connection Unit

In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used:


Signal classification

Signal address

Input signal (128 inputs)


Output signal (128 outputs)

5.2.3

X212.0 to X227.7
Y212.0 to Y227.7

Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel

In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used:


Signal classification

Connector on I/O module

No. of signals

Signal address

Input signal (48 inputs)

CE56
CE57
CE56
CE57

24
24
16
16

X240.0 to X242.7
X243.0 to X245.7
Y240.0 to Y241.7
Y242.0 to Y243.7

Output signal (32 outputs)

Connector table
CE56
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

CE57

A
0V
X240.0
X240.2
X240.4
X240.6
X241.0
X241.2
X241.4
X241.6
X242.0
X242.2
X242.4
X242.6
DICOM0

B
+24A
X240.1
X240.3
X240.5
X240.7
X241.1
X241.3
X241.5
X241.7
X242.1
X242.3
X242.5
X242.7

Y240.0
Y240.2
Y240.4
Y240.6
Y241.0
Y241.2
Y241.4
Y241.6
DOCOM
DOCOM

Y240.1
Y240.3
Y240.5
Y240.7
Y241.1
Y241.3
Y241.5
Y241.7
DOCOM
DOCOM

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

A
0V
X243.0
X243.2
X243.4
X243.6
X244.0
X244.2
X244.4
X244.6
X245.0
X245.2
X245.4
X245.6

B
+24A
X243.1
X243.3
X243.5
X243.7
X244.1
X244.3
X244.5
X244.7
X245.1
X245.3
X245.5
X245.7
DICOM5

Y242.0
Y242.2
Y242.4
Y242.6
Y243.0
Y243.2
Y243.4
Y243.6
DOCOM
DOCOM

Y242.1
Y242.3
Y242.5
Y242.7
Y243.1
Y243.3
Y243.5
Y243.7
DOCOM
DOCOM

Note) +24A on CE56-B01 and CE57-B01 are 24V d.c. internal power supply from wiring PCB.
Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.

- 22 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of input signals (1)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691

+24A

CPD1
(01)

+24A

(02)

0V

CE56
(B01)
(A01)

X240.0
X240.1
X240.2
X240.3
X240.4
X240.5
X240.6
X240.7

(A02)

RV

(B02)

RV

(A03)

RV

(B03)

RV

(A04)

RV

(B04)

RV

(A05)

RV

(B05)

RV

(A14)

(DICOM0)
X241.0
X241.1

(B06)

RV

X241.2

RV

X241.3

RV

X241.4

RV

X241.5

RV

X241.6

RV

X241.7

(A06)

RV

(A07)
(B07)
(A08)
(B08)
(A09)
(B09)

RV

- 23 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

X242.0

RV

X242.1

RV

X242.2
X242.3
X242.4

CE56
(A10)
(B10)
(A11)

RV

(B11)

RV

(A12)

RV

X242.5

RV

X242.6

RV

X242.7

RV

(B12)
(A13)
(B13)

- 24 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of input signals (2)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691

+24A

CPD1
(01)

+24A

(02)

0V

CE57
(B01)
(A01)

X243.0
X243.1
X243.2
X243.3
X243.4
X243.5
X243.6

(B02)

RV

(A03)

RV

(B03)

RV

(A04)

RV

(B04)

RV

(A05)

RV

X243.7

RV

X244.0

RV

X244.1

RV

X244.2

RV

X244.3

RV

X244.4

RV

X244.5

RV

X244.6

RV

X244.7

(A02)

RV

(B05)

(A06)
(B06)
(A07)
(B07)
(A08)
(B08)
(A09)
(B09)

RV

- 25 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

X245.0

RV

X245.1

RV

X245.2
X245.3
X245.4

CE57
(A10)
(B10)
(A11)

RV

(B11)

RV

(A12)

RV

X245.5

RV

X245.6

RV

X245.7

RV

(B12)
(A13)
(B13)
(B14)

(DICOM5)

NOTE
X240.0 through X240.7 and X245.0 through X245.7 are DI pins for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0
CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to the +24V d.c. power supply, a DI
signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is
connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal.
To prevent this from occurring,the connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and
DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0V power supply is recommended whereever
possible.For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common
voltage is fixed, the input is 0. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for
which a common voltage can be selected, the input is 0 when the DICOMx
common select pin is connected to the 0 V power supply or 1 when it is
connected to the +24 V d.c. power supply. Connect DICOM0 and DICOM5
when used. When addresses from X240.0 to X240.7 and X245.0 to X245.7 are
not used, connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 to the 0V power supply.

- 26 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of output signals


(1)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691

DOCOM

CE56
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)

24V d.c. EXTERNAL


POWER SUPPLY

V+ 0V
0V

Y240.0

(A16)
DV

Y240.1

DV

(B16)

Y240.2

DV

(A17)

DV

(B17)

DV

(A18)

DV

(B18)

DV

(A19)

DV

(B19)

DV

(A20)

DV

(B20)

DV

(A21)

DV

(B21)

DV

(A22)

DV

(B22)

DV

(A23)

DV

(B23)

Y240.3
Y240.4
Y240.5
Y240.6
Y240.7

Y241.0
Y241.1
Y241.2
Y241.3
Y241.4
Y241.5
Y241.6
Y241.7

Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57.


It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57.
- 27 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel: Connection of output signals


(2)
I/O module
A20B-2004-0691

DOCOM

CE57
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)

24V d.c. EXTERNAL


POWER SUPPLY

V+ 0V
0V

Y242.0

(A16)
DV

Y242.1

DV

(B16)

Y242.2

DV

(A17)

DV

(B17)

DV

(A18)

DV

(B18)

DV

(A19)

DV

(B19)

DV

(A20)

DV

(B20)

DV

(A21)

DV

(B21)

DV

(A22)

DV

(B22)

DV

(A23)

DV

(B23)

Y242.3
Y242.4
Y242.5
Y242.6
Y242.7

Y243.0
Y243.1
Y243.2
Y243.3
Y243.4
Y243.5
Y243.6
Y243.7

Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57.


It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57.
- 28 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

5.2.3.1

Terminal Module B

This module is connected to additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel to relay input/output signals
via a screw terminal block. Up to two terminal modules can be mounted.
In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used:
Signal classification

Terminal Module

No. of signals

Signal address

Input signal (48 inputs)

1st module (#1)


2nd module (#2)

24
24

X240.0 to X242.7
X243.0 to X245.7

Output signal (32 outputs)

1st module (#1)


2nd module (#2)

16
16

Y240.0 to Y241.7
Y242.0 to Y243.7

Wiring PCB
A16B-1110-0520
JD1A

JD1A

JD1B

24V d.c. external


power supply
(DOCOM)

CE56

CE70

24 inputs
(X240.0 to X242.7)
16 outputs
(Y240.0 to Y241.7)

Terminal module B#1


A03B-0815-C022

CE70

CE57

24V d.c. power supply


from Wriing PCB (+24A)

CPD1

24 inputs
(X243.0 to X245.7)
16 outputs
(Y242.0 to Y243.7)

Terminal module B#2


A03B-0815-C022

I/O module
A20B-2002-0691

Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2. It need not be connected to both #1 and #2.

- 29 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Pin layout of terminal module B (#1) [Connection between CE56 and CE70]
CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25

0V
X240.0
X240.2
X240.4
X240.6
X241.0
X241.2
X241.4
X241.6
X242.0
X242.2
X242.4
X242.6
DICOM0
Y240.0
Y240.2
Y240.4
Y240.6
Y241.0
Y241.2
Y241.4
Y241.6
DOCOM
DOCOM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25

+24A
X240.1
X240.3
X240.5
X240.7
X241.1
X241.3
X241.5
X241.7
X242.1
X242.3
X242.5
X242.7

Y240.1
Y240.3
Y240.5
Y240.7
Y241.1
Y241.3
Y241.5
Y241.7
DOCOM
DOCOM

XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0V
DICOM0
X240.2
X240.3
DICOM0
X240.6
X240.7
+24A
X241.2
X241.3
+24A
X241.6
X241.7
+24A
X242.2
X242.3

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

0V
DICOM0
X240.0
X240.1
DICOM0
X240.4
X240.5
+24A
X241.0
X241.1
+24A
X241.4
X241.5
+24A
X242.0
X242.1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

+24A
X242.6
X242.7
0V
Y240.2
Y240.3
0V
Y240.6
Y240.7
0V
Y241.2
Y241.3
0V
Y241.6
Y241.7
0V

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

+24A
X242.4
X242.5
0V
Y240.0
Y240.1
0V
Y240.4
Y240.5
0V
Y241.0
Y241.1
0V
Y241.4
Y241.5
DOCOM

NOTE
+24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal power
supply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.
DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but
no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2.
As for DICOM0, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 30 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Pin layout of terminal module B (#2) [Connection between CE57 and CE70]
CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25

0V
X243.0
X243.2
X243.4
X243.6
X244.0
X244.2
X244.4
X244.6
X245.0
X245.2
X245.4
X245.6

Y242.0
Y242.2
Y242.4
Y242.6
Y243.0
Y243.2
Y243.4
Y243.6
DOCOM
DOCOM

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25

+24A
X243.1
X243.3
X243.5
X243.7
X244.1
X244.3
X244.5
X244.7
X245.1
X245.3
X245.5
X245.7
DICOM5
Y242.1
Y242.3
Y242.5
Y242.7
Y243.1
Y243.3
Y243.5
Y243.7
DOCOM
DOCOM

XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0V
DICOM5
X243.2
X243.3
DICOM5
X243.6
X243.7
+24A
X244.2
X244.3
+24A
X244.6
X244.7
+24A
X245.2
X245.3

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

0V
DICOM5
X243.0
X243.1
DICOM5
X243.4
X243.5
+24A
X244.0
X244.1
+24A
X244.4
X244.5
+24A
X245.0
X245.1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

+24A
X245.6
X245.7
0V
Y242.2
Y242.3
0V
Y242.6
Y242.7
0V
Y243.2
Y243.3
0V
Y243.6
Y243.7
0V

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

+24A
X245.4
X245.5
0V
Y242.0
Y242.1
0V
Y242.4
Y242.5
0V
Y243.0
Y243.1
0V
Y243.4
Y243.5
DOCOM

NOTE
+24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal power
supply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.
DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but
no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2.
As for DICOM5, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 31 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #1


I/O module A20B-2004-0691

+24A

Wiring PCB

CPD1
(01)
(02)

XS09
(A05)
(B05)

+24A

Terminal module B#1

CE70
(B01)
(A01)

CE56
(B01)
(A01)

+24

X240.1
X240.2
X240.3
X240.4
X240.5
X240.6
X240.7

RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV

(A02)

(A02)

(B02)

(B02)

(A03)

(A03)

(B03)

(B03)

(A04)

(A04)

(B04)

(B04)

(A05)

(A05)

(B05)

(B05)

(23)
(5)
(6)
(7)

X241.1
X241.2
X241.3
X241.4
X241.5
X241.6
X241.7

RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV

XB2

0V

(A14)

(A14)

(A06)

(A06)

(B06)

(B06)

(A07)

(A07)

(B07)

(B07)

(A08)

(A08)

(B08)

(B08)

(A09)

(A09)

(29)
(11)
(12)

(B09)

(B09)

(13)

(24)
(25)
(26)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(27)
(28)

+24A

X241.0

XT70A
(18)
(19)

(4)
(21)
(22)

+24
DICOM0

0V

(20)
(2)
(3)

- 32 -

0V

X240.0

XB1

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Terminal module B#1

+24A

I/O module A20B-2004-0691

X242.0

X242.1

X242.2

X242.3

X242.4

X242.5

X242.6

X242.7

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

CE56
(A10)

CE70
(A10)

XT70A
(30)
(31)

(B10)

(B10)

(32)

(A11)

(A11)

(14)
(15)

(B11)

(B11)

(A12)

(A12)

(16)
XT70B
(17)
(18)

(B12)

(B12)

(19)

(A13)

(A13)

(1)
(2)

(B13)

(B13)

(3)

NOTE
X240.0 to X240.7 are DI pins that allows common signal selection. Specifically,
when setting terminal XB1 is set to 0 V and setting terminal XB2 is set to +24,
and DICOM0 is connected to 24V d.c., DI signals with logic inverted can be
input. In this case, if a cable ground-fault accident occurs, a state equivalent to
the DI signal ON state is observed. From the point of view of safety, setting
terminal XB1 should be set to +24 and XB2 be set to 0 V, where possible, so
that 0 V is applied to DICOM0.

- 33 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #2


I/O module A20B-2004-0691

+24A

Wiring PCB

CPD1
(01)
(02)

XS09
(A05)
(B05)

+24A

Terminal module B#2

CE70
(B01)
(A01)

CE57
(B01)
(A01)

X243.2
X243.3
X243.4
X243.5
X243.6
X243.7

X244.0
X244.1
X244.2
X244.3
X244.4
X244.5
X244.6
X244.7

RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV

RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV

(A02)

(A02)

(B02)

(B02)

(A03)

(A03)

(B03)

(B03)

(A04)

(A04)

(B04)

(B04)

(A05)

(A05)

(23)
XT70B(1)
XT70A(6)

(B05)

(B05)

(7)

(A06)

(A06)

(24)
(25)

(B06)

(B06)

(A07)

(A07)

(B07)

(B07)

(A08)

(A08)

(B08)

(B08)

(A09)

(A09)

(29)
(11)
(12)

(B09)

(B09)

(13)

(20)
(14)
(3)
(4)
XT70B(17)
XT70A(22)

(26)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(27)
(28)

- 34 -

0V

X243.1

RV

+24A

X243.0

XT70A
(30)
(19)

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

I/O module A20B-2004-0691

+24
X245.0

X245.1

X245.2

X245.3

X245.4

X245.5

X245.6

X245.7

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

XB1

0V

CE57
(A10)

CE70
(A10)

XT70A
(18)
(31)

(B10)

(B10)

(32)

(A11)

(A11)

(2)
(15)

(B11)

(B11)

(16)

(A12)

(A12)

(21)
XT70B(18)

(B12)

(B12)

(19)

(A13)

(A13)

XT70A(5)
XT70B(2)

(B13)

(B13)

(3)
+24

DICOM5

0V

+24A

Terminal module B#2

XB2

0V

(B14)

(B14)

NOTE
X245.0 to X245.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to
"0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM5 to 24V d.c., the logic of the DI signal
can be inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in the
cable, the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, we
recommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM5
to 0V whenever possible.

- 35 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Output signal (DO) circuit diagram of terminal module B #2 address enclosed in ()

DOCOM

CE56, (CE57)
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)

CE70
(A24),(B24)
(A25),(B25)

0V

Terminal module B#1(#2)

I/O module A20B-2004-0691

XT70B
(32)
(16)
XT70A
(1)(17)
XT70B
(20)

(A16)

(A16)

(21)

DV

(B16)

(B16)

Y240.2 (Y242.2)

DV

(A17)

(A17)

(22)
(4)
(5)

Y240.3 (Y243.3)

DV

(B17)

(B17)

DV

(A18)

(A18)

DV

(B18)

(B18)

DV

(A19)

(A19)

(25)
(7)
(8)

DV

(B19)

(B19)

(9)

DV

(A20)

(A20)

(26)
(27)

DV

(B20)

(B20)

DV

(A21)

(A21)

DV

(B21)

(B21)

DV

(A22)

(A22)

DV

(B22)

(B22)

DV

(A23)

(A23)

(31)
(13)
(14)

DV

(B23)

(B23)

(15)

Y240.0 (Y242.0)

External 24 VDC
power supply
()
()

Relay

DV
Y240.1 (Y242.1)

Y240.4 (Y242.4)
Y240.5 (Y242.5)
Y240.6 (Y242.6)
Y240.7 (Y242.7)

Y241.0 (Y243.0)
Y241.1 (Y243.1)
Y241.2 (Y243.2)
Y241.3 (Y243.3)
Y241.4 (Y243.3)
Y241.5 (Y243.5)
Y241.6 (Y243.6)
Y241.7 (Y243.7)

Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2.


It need not be connected to both #1 and #2.
- 36 -

(6)
(23)
(24)

(28)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(29)
(30)

Relay

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

5.2.4

Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)

I/O modules, terminal modules, and connection cables can be used to relay input/output signals via a
screw terminal block. You can expand the number of inputs to up to 96 and the number of outputs to up
to 64.
In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used:
Signal
classification

I/O module

Terminal module

No. of signals

Signal address

Input signal
(96 inputs)

I/O module B1
1st I/O module E1 (#1)
2nd I/O module E1 (#2)
3rd I/O module E1 (#3)

1st module (#1)


2nd module (#2)
3rd module (#3)
4th module (#4)

24
24
24
24

X228.0 to X230.7
X231.0 to X233.7
X234.0 to X236.7
X237.0 to X239.7

Output signal
(64 outputs)

I/O module B1
1st I/O module E1 (#1)
2nd I/O module E1 (#2)
3rd I/O module E1 (#3)

1st module (#1)


2nd module (#2)
3rd module (#3)
4th module (#4)

16
16
16
16

Y228.0 to Y229.7
Y230.0 to Y231.7
Y232.0 to Y233.7
Y234.0 to Y235.7

Wiring PCB

I/O Link cable

A16B-1110-0520
JD1A
Inter-module connection cable

JD1B
XP150

CB150
CA52
I/O module B1
A03B-0824-C001

Flat cables

Terminal module #1
A03B-0815-C020

CA53
XP150

CB150
CA52

Terminal module #2
A03B-0815-C020

1st I/O module E1 (#1)


A03B-0824-C003
CA53

XP150

CB150
CA52
2nd I/O module E1 (#2)
A03B-0824-C003

Terminal module #3
A03B-0815-C020

CA53
XP150

CB150
CA52

Terminal module #4
A03B-0815-C020

3rd I/O module E1 (#3)


A03B-0824-C003

- 37 -

24 V d.c. external power supply 1


24 V d.c. external power supply 2
(Both are additionally required.)

24 inputs
(X228.0 to X230.7)
16 outputs
(Y228.0 to Y229.7)

24 inputs
(X231.0 to X233.7)
16 outputs
(Y230.0 to Y231.7)

24 inputs
(X234.0 to X236.7)
16 outputs
(Y232.0 to Y233.7)

24 inputs
(X237.0 to X239.7)
16 outputs
(Y234.0 to Y235.7)

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Mounting diagram
Flat cables

I/O module B1
A03B-0824-C001

3rd I/O module E1 (#3)


A03B-0824-C003

2nd I/O module E1 (#2)


A03B-0824-C003

- 38 -

1st I/O module E1 (#1)


A03B-0824-C003

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Connector table of terminal module #1 connected to I/O module B1


XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25

+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y229.1
Y228.1
0V
Y229.3
Y228.3
0V
Y229.5
Y228.5
X229.0
Y229.7
Y228.7
X229.2
X230.1
X228.1
X229.4
X230.3
X228.3
X229.6
X230.5
X228.5
X230.7
X228.7

B1
Y229.0
B2
Y228.0
B3
0V
B4
Y229.2
B5
Y228.2
B6
0V
B7
Y229.4
B8
Y228.4
B9 DICOM0
B10 Y229.6
B11 Y228.6
B12 X229.1
B13 X230.0
B14 X228.0
B15 X229.3
B16 X230.2
B17 X228.2
B18 X229.5
B19 X230.4
B20 X228.4
B21 X229.7
B22 X230.6
B23 X228.6
B24 +24V1
B25 +24V1

Number of signals and addresses


24 inputs (X228.0 to X230.7)
16 outputs (Y228.0 to Y229.7)

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0V
DICOM
X228.2
X228.3
DICOM
X228.6
X228.7
+24V2
X229.2
X229.3
+24V2
X229.6
X229.7
+24V2
X230.2
X230.3

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

DICOM
X228.0
X228.1
DICOM
X228.4
X228.5
+24V2
X229.0
X229.1
+24V2
X229.4
X229.5
+24V2
X230.0
X230.1

+24V2
X230.6
X230.7
0V
Y228.2
Y228.3
0V
Y228.6
Y228.7
0V
Y229.2
Y229.3
0V
Y229.6
Y229.7
0V

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

+24V2
X230.4
X230.5
0V
Y228.0
Y228.1
0V
Y228.4
Y228.5
0V
Y229.0
Y229.1
0V
Y229.4
Y229.5
+24V1

NOTE
+24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply,
and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1.
+24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are
signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2.
As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 39 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Connector table of terminal module #2 connected to 1st I/O module E1 (#1)


XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25

+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y231.1
Y230.1
0V
Y231.3
Y230.3
0V
Y231.5
Y230.5
X232.0
Y231.7
Y230.7
X232.2
X233.1
X231.1
X232.4
X233.3
X231.3
X232.6
X233.5
X231.5
X233.7
X231.7

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25

Y231.0
Y230.0
0V
Y231.2
Y230.2
0V
Y231.4
Y230.4
DICOM0
Y231.6
Y230.6
X232.1
X233.0
X231.0
X232.3
X233.2
X231.2
X232.5
X233.4
X231.4
X232.7
X233.6
X231.6
+24V1
+24V1

Number of signals and addresses


24 inputs (X231.0 to X233.7)
16 outputs (Y230.0 to Y231.7)

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)


17
1
0V
18
2 DICOM
19
3 X231.2
20
4 X231.3
21
5 DICOM
22
6 X231.6
23
7 X231.7
24
8 +24V2
25
9 X232.2
26
10 X232.3
27
11 +24V2
28
12 X232.6
29
13 X232.7
30
14 +24V2
31
15 X233.2
32
16 X233.3

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

DICOM
X231.0
X231.1
DICOM
X231.4
X231.5
+24V2
X232.0
X232.1
+24V2
X232.4
X232.5
+24V2
X233.0
X233.1

+24V2
X233.6
X233.7
0V
Y230.2
Y230.3
0V
Y230.6
Y230.7
0V
Y231.2
Y231.3
0V
Y231.6
Y231.7
0V

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

+24V2
X233.4
X233.5
0V
Y230.0
Y230.1
0V
Y230.4
Y230.5
0V
Y231.0
Y231.1
0V
Y231.4
Y231.5
+24V1

NOTE
+24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply,
and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1.
+24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are
signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2.
As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 40 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Connector table of terminal module #3 connected to 2nd I/O module E1 (#2)


XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25

+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y233.1
Y232.1
0V
Y233.3
Y232.3
0V
Y233.5
Y232.5
X235.0
Y233.7
Y232.7
X234.2
X236.1
X234.1
X235.4
X236.3
X234.3
X235.6
X236.5
X234.5
X236.7
X234.7

B1 Y233.0
B2 Y232.0
B3
0V
B4 Y233.2
B5 Y232.2
B6
0V
B7 Y233.4
B8 Y232.4
B9 DICOM0
B10 Y233.6
B11 Y232.6
B12 X235.1
B13 X236.0
B14 X234.0
B15 X235.3
B16 X236.2
B17 X234.2
B18 X235.5
B19 X236.4
B20 X234.4
B21 X235.7
B22 X236.6
B23 X234.6
B24 +24V1
B25 +24V1

Number of signals and addresses


24 inputs (X234.0 to X236.7)
16 outputs (Y232.0 to Y233.7)

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0V
DICOM
X234.2
X234.3
DICOM
X234.6
X234.7
+24V2
X235.2
X235.3
+24V2
X235.6
X235.7
+24V2
X236.2
X236.3

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

DICOM
X234.0
X234.1
DICOM
X234.4
X234.5
+24V2
X235.0
X235.1
+24V2
X235.4
X235.5
+24V2
X236.0
X236.1

+24V2
X236.6
X236.7
0V
Y232.2
Y232.3
0V
Y232.6
Y232.7
0V
Y233.2
Y233.3
0V
Y233.6
Y233.7
0V

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

+24V2
X236.4
X236.5
0V
Y232.0
Y232.1
0V
Y232.4
Y232.5
0V
Y233.0
Y233.1
0V
Y233.4
Y233.5
+24V1

NOTE
+24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply,
and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1.
+24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are
signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2.
As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 41 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Connector table of terminal module #4 connected to 3rd I/O module E1 (#3)


XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25

+24V2
+24V2
0V
Y235.1
Y234.1
0V
Y235.3
Y234.3
0V
Y235.5
Y234.5
X238.0
Y235.7
Y234.7
X238.2
X239.1
X237.1
X238.4
X239.3
X237.3
X238.6
X239.5
X237.5
X239.7
X237.7

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25

Y235.0
Y234.0
0V
Y235.2
Y234.2
0V
Y235.4
Y234.4
DICOM0
Y235.6
Y234.6
X238.1
X239.0
X237.0
X238.3
X239.2
X237.2
X238.5
X239.4
X237.4
X238.7
X239.6
X237.6
+24V1
+24V1

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

0V
DICOM
X237.2
X237.3
DICOM
X237.6
X237.7
+24V2
X238.2
X238.3
+24V2
X238.6
X238.7
+24V2
X239.2
X239.3

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Number of signals and addresses


24 inputs (X237.0 to X239.7)
16 outputs (Y234.0 to Y235.7)

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24V2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

DICOM
X237.0
X237.1
DICOM
X237.4
X237.5
+24V2
X238.0
X238.1
+24V2
X238.4
X238.5
+24V2
X239.0
X239.1

+24V2
X239.6
X239.7
0V
Y234.2
Y234.3
0V
Y234.6
Y234.7
0V
Y235.2
Y235.3
0V
Y235.6
Y235.7
0V

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

+24V2
X239.4
X239.5
0V
Y234.0
Y234.1
0V
Y234.4
Y234.5
0V
Y235.0
Y235.1
0V
Y235.4
Y235.5
+24V1

NOTE
+24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply,
and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1.
+24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are
signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2.
As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages.
- 42 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

< Input signal (DI) circuit diagram >


Connector panel I/O module

Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7

RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV

Terminal module
XP150
XT150B
(B24)
(32)
(B25)
XB1
0V XT150A
+24
(17)

(42)

(B14)

(43)

(A17)

(44)

(B17)

(45)

(A20)

(46)

(B20)

(47)

(A23)

(48)

(B23)

(49)

(A25)

(18)
(19)

Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7

RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV

+24V2

(7)
XB2

0V

(24)

(B09)

(25)

(A12)

(26)

(B12)

(27)

(A15)

(28)

(B15)

(29)

(A18)

(30)

(B18)

(31)

(A21)

(29)
(11)
(12)

(32)

(B21)

(13)

(19),(20),
(21),(22),
(23)

(A03),(B03),
(A06),(B06),
(A09)

XT150A (1),
XT150B (16)

- 43 -

0V

DC24V Power 2

(23)
(5)
(6)

(24)
(25)
(26)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(27)
(28)

+24V2

Xm+1.0

+24V1

(4)
(21)
(22)

+24
DICOM0

DC24V Power 1

(20)
(2)
(3)

0V

+24V1

CB150
(18)
(50)

0V

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

Terminal module

+24V2

Connector panel I/O module

Xm+2.0

Xm+2.1

Xm+2.2

Xm+2.3

Xm+2.4

Xm+2.5

Xm+2.6

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

XP150
(B13)

XT150A
(30)
(31)

(11)

(A16)

(32)

(12)

(B16)

(14)
(15)

(13)

(A19)

(14)

(B19)

(16)
XT150B
(17)
(18)

(15)

(A22)

(19)

(16)

(B22)

(1)
(2)

(17)

(A24)

(3)

+24V2

Xm+2.7

RV

CB150
(10)

Basic module:
Xm = 228
Expansion module 1:Xm = 231
Expansion module 2:Xm = 234
Expansion module 3:Xm = 237

NOTE
Xm+0.1 to Xm+0.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to
"0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM to +24V, the logic of the DI signal can
be inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in the cable,
the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, we
recommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM to
0V whenever possible.
The setting terminals are factory-set as follows:
Setting terminal XB1: +24
Setting terminal XB2: 0V

- 44 -

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

< Output signal (DO) circuit diagram >

+24V2

+24V2
0V

Terminal module

Connector panel I/O module

CB150
(01),(33)

XP150
(A01),(A02)

(34)

(B02)

(21)

DV

(35)

(A05)

DV

(36)

(B05)

(22)
(4)
(5)

DV

(37)

(A08)

DV

(38)

(B08)

DV

(39)

(A11)

DV

(40)

(B11)

(25)
(7)
(8)

DV

(41)

(A14)

(9)

DV

(02)

(B01)

(26)
(27)

DV

(03)

(A04)

DV

(04)

(B04)

DV

(05)

(A07)

DV

(06)

(B07)

DV

(07)

(A10)

DV

(08)

(B10)

(31)
(13)
(14)

DV

(09)

(A13)

(15)

Yn+0.0

XT150B
(20)

Relay

DV
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7

Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7

Basic module:
Yn = 228
Expansion module 1:Yn = 230
Expansion module 2:Yn = 232
Expansion module 3:Yn = 234

- 45 -

(6)
(23)
(24)

(28)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(29)
(30)

Relay

5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

5.2.5

B-85314EN-1/01

Optional I/O Module Connection


JD1A

Wiring PCB

Optional I/O modules must be connected in series by using the I/O Link interface. Connect the modules
in the following sequence:
In the case of standard setting, connect the modules in the sequence indicated below.
Wiring PCB: JD1A
|
Group 0: I/O Unit Model-A
|
Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit
|
Group 2: Additional I/O-1
|
Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operators Panel

Example: I/O Link Connection Unit and additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel.
Wiring PCB: JD1A
|
Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit
|
Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operators Panel

Connect the modules in the ascending order of group numbers starting from the connector panel.
Unused modules need not be connected.

5.2.6

Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used

When using optional I/O modules, set the following parameters:


K932#0=1 I/O Unit Model-A
K932#1=1 I/O Link connection unit
K932#2=1 Additional I/O-1
K932#3=1 Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel

SUPPLEMENT
The screen for setting keep relays in the nine hundreds can be displayed by
pressing the emergency stop button.
- 46 -

6.ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC

B-85314EN-1/01

ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM


PMC

The following addresses are available to custom PMC.


Address
type

Symbol

---

---

Function
Input from external device to
custom PMC
Output from custom PMC to
external device
Work register
Input from system ladder
program to custom PMC
Output from custom PMC to
system ladder program
Alarm operator message
display request
Non-volatile memory (allows
setting of parameters)
Non-volatile register (allows
setting of parameters)

R
SI**_*
SO**_*
A

---

---

---

Editing
Input only
Input and output
Input and output
Input only

Address
X0.0 to X5.7 (CH1)
X200.0 to X327.7 (CH2)
Y0.0 to Y3.7 (CH1)
Y200.0 to Y327.7 (CH2)
R2000.0-R2999.7
See Chapter 12.

Input and output


Input and output

A100.0 to A149.7

Input and output

D7000 to D7999
D7000.0 to D7999.7
K35#0 to K44#7

Input and output

Timers and counters can use the following numbers.


Timer/Counter
Timer

No.

Variable timer
Fixed timer

121 to 200 (T240 to T398)


1 to 140
40 to 69 (C156 to C274)

Counter

The following subprogram numbers can be used:


Subprogram number

P1500 to P5000

The following special auxiliary relay numbers can be used:


Common to DIFU/DIFD

1 to 100

- 47 -

7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS

B-85314EN-1/01

INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS

To input alphabetic characters, use the corresponding soft keys (in the case of the standard operator's
panel)
Press the <alphabetic letter input> key on the operator's panel.

Press
Soft keys are displayed as follows.
[In half mode]
O

<

>

FULL

ABC/
abc

ALTER

DELETE

[In full mode]


A

SPACE

<

>

&

"

'

HALF

ABC/
abc

ALTER

DELETE

Use the rightmost and leftmost soft keys to change the alphabetic characters.

- 48 -

7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS

B-85314EN-1/01

To switch between half and full modes, use the procedure below.
[Switch from half mode to full mode]
N

FULL

ABC/
abc

ALTER

DELETE

ALTER

DELETE

Press
[Switch from full mode to half mode]
:

HALF

ABC/
abc

Press

Press
To leave alphabetic character input mode, press the <alphabetic letter input> key again on the operator's
panel.

- 49 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

EDITING

You can edit ladder and other programs on the PMC screen.

CAUTION
With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. When editing
ladder programs, messages, symbols, comments, and so forth, check that "2ND
PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.
Never perform editing or deleting with the first PMC.

8.1

STARTING AN EDITING SESSION

[Turn the power ON]

[Press the emergency stop button]

[Display the PMC screen]


(If the QUICK screen is displayed, press the <QUICK/NC> button on the
operator's panel to display the CNC screen.)
Display the CNC SYSTEM-SYSTEM screen.

or

Press the above keys:

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times until the following soft keys are displayed:

Each soft key corresponds to functions as listed below. Display a desired screen.
PMC MAINTE:
PMC LADDER:
PMC CONFIG:

Displays the signal status, and sets the trace function and PMC parameters.
Lists and edits a ladder program.
Lists and edits titles, messages, and comments.

- 50 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

8.2

EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS

8.2.1

Switching to the Edit Screen

[Switch to the ladder diagram screen]


Press soft key [PMC LADDER].

Press the soft key [(OPRT)].

Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if
necessary.)

Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.

- 51 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

[Select the edit area]


Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) by using the cursor keys on the operator's panel then press the
soft key [ZOOM].

If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key
[LADDER].

- 52 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

[Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR]


To switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR, press soft key [EDIT] on PMC LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR. (The [EDIT] key is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)

8.2.2

Editing Ladder Programs

Ladder programs may be created between "SUB71" and "SUB72".

May be created in
this area.

Press the rightmost soft key [+] to change the displayed soft keys.

CAUTION
Never delete or edit functional instructions "SUB71" and "SUB72".
Do not create ladder programs outside the "SUB71" to "SUB72" area.
- 53 -

8.EDITING
Soft key
LIST
SEARCH MENU
CREATE
ZOOM

CREATE NET
AUTO
SELECT

DELETE

CUT
COPY
PASTE

CHANGE ADRS
ADRS MAP
UPDATE

RESTRE

SCREEN SETING
START/STOP
CANCEL EDIT

EXIT EDIT

B-85314EN-1/01

Menu on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen


Function
Lists ladder programs. (Not used.)
Displays the search menu in the soft key area.
Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to add a new net at the cursor position.
Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder
program. If the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program will
be executed immediately.
Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to edit the net at the cursor position.
Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter numbers.
Used to specify more than one net to perform an edit operation such as [DELETE], [CUT],
and [COPY]. Press soft key [SELECT] to specify the start of the range to be selected, then
use the cursor movement keys or the search function to specify the end of the range. After
selecting nets, press the desired edit soft key to perform that edit operation.
Deletes a selected net. When deleted, the net will be lost. If you want to restore the deleted
net, you must use soft key [RESTRE] to return the entire ladder program to the state in which
it was before the edit operation.
Removes a selected net and places it in the clipboard. To paste the net, use soft key
[PASTE].
Makes a copy of a selected net and place it in the clipboard. To paste the copy, use soft key
[PASTE].
Inserts the net placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY] at the cursor position.
Pressing soft key [PASTE] when a net is selected with [SELECT] causes the selected net to
be replaced by the one placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY].
Displays the address conversion soft keys to use the address conversion function.
Calls the ADDRESS MAP screen to check the reference of the used addresses.
Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder
program. When the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program
will be executed immediately.
Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to
the state in which it was when the system switched to the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen or to the state in which it was when [UPDATE] was last used. After having performed
a wrong edit operation, you can use this key if recovery is difficult to accomplish.
Calls the setup screen of the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. You can change
various types of settings related to ladder diagram edit operations.
Controls the execution of the ladder program. Soft key [RUN] starts the execution of the
ladder program, and soft key [STOP] stops its execution.
Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to
the state in which it was when the system switched to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen or when [UPDATE] was last used. Displays the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far and terminates editing.
You cannot move to another screen during edit operation of a ladder diagram by pressing
any function key such as the SYSTEM key unless you terminate editing.

- 54 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

[Create/add a new net]


(1) Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR. (See Subsection 8.2.1.)
Position the cursor on SUB72. Alternatively, position the cursor on the net immediately below the
position at which you want to add a new net. Press soft key [CREATE].

The PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen is displayed.


(2) Create a ladder program using the variety of instructions displayed as soft keys.
To set an address, press the <alphabetic letter input> key on the operator's panel; this causes
alphabetic letters to be displayed as soft keys, enabling you to enter alphabetic letters using these
soft keys.
For the operator's panel with the full keyboard: Use the alphabetic keys on the operator's panel to
enter alphabetic letters.

- 55 -

8.EDITING
Instruction

B-85314EN-1/01

Menu on the NET EDITOR screen


Function
Reads the signal state of a specified address.
Reads the signal state of a specified address and inverts it.
Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address.
Inverts the state of a logic operation result and writes it to a specified address.

FUNC

Selects a functional instruction.


Connects one step to another.
Deletes a basic or functional instruction.
Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Left side of an instruction)
Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Right side of an instruction)

AUTO

Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter


numbers.
Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address to keep it.
Resets a kept output.

TABLE

RESTRE
NEXT NET

INSLIN

INSCLM
APPCLM

CANCEL EDIT
EXIT

Displayed if the cursor is positioned on the functional instruction COD (SUB7) or CODB
(SUB27). It is used to change the contents of the data table of these functional
instructions.
Returns the currently edited net to the state in which it was when editing started.
Terminates the editing of the current net and allows you to edit the next net.
When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [ZOOM] on the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates changing the current net and enables
the next net to be edited.
When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [CREATE NET] on the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates creating the current net,
inserts the created net, and immediately enters the status in which a new net is created
(empty net status).
Inserts a blank line at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram located below the
cursor position will be shifted downward by one line. If a blank line is inserted in the
middle of a functional instruction, the functional instruction will be expanded vertically,
expanding the space between input conditions.
Inserts a blank column at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the right of the
cursor position moves right one column.
Inserts a blank column at the right of the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the
right of the cursor position moves right one column and the ladder diagram is extended
horizontally if necessary.
Returns the net currently being edited to the state at the start of the editing and displays
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
Analyzes the net being edited and stores it in the ladder program. If any error is found in
the net, the NET EDITOR screen remains displayed and an error message is displayed.

- 56 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

(3) To enter a functional instruction, first press soft key [FUNC].


Then, position the cursor on the functional instruction you want to enter and press soft key
[SELECT]. This causes the functional instruction to be inserted into the NET EDITOR screen,
allowing you to specify various parameters (timer No. and time in the case of SUB24 fixed timer).

(4) Ladder programs such as those shown below cannot be created.

The output coil has conditional branching.

- 57 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

[Modify the ladder program]


(1) Delete an entered instruction:
Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key

To delete an instruction entered in parallel, follow the procedure below.


Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key
Then, press soft key

- 58 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

To delete a functional instruction, follow the procedure below.


Position the cursor on the desired functional instruction No.
Press soft key
.
This causes the functional instruction to be deleted, separating nets. Use soft key
the nets.

To delete a net, follow the procedure below.


Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
Position the cursor on the net you want to delete, and press soft key [DELETE].

- 59 -

to connect

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

(2) Add an instruction:


Call the NET EDITOR screen. Position the cursor on the location where you want to add an
instruction. Press soft key

or

to add an instruction, then set an address.

If required, before adding a functional instruction, use soft key

to delete the net from the

location at which the instruction is to be added, reserving the space for the functional instruction.

- 60 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

To add a functional instruction between instructions or between nets, follow the procedure
below.
Press the rightmost soft key. This changes the soft key menu.
To add an instruction between nets or between instructions entered in parallel:
Move the cursor below the position at which you want to add an instruction, then press
soft key [INSLIN].
To add an instruction between instructions entered in series:
Move the cursor to the right or left of the position at which an instruction is to be added.
To insert an instruction to the right of the cursor position, press soft key [APPCLM]; to
insert it to the left of the cursor position, press soft key [INSCLM].
Add an instruction to the created space.

- 61 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

(3) Copy or move a net.


Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Position the
cursor on the net you want to copy. Press soft key [SELECT]. Use the cursor or other keys to
specify the copy area. After specifying the area, press soft key [COPY]. Move the cursor to the
position at which you want to copy the net, and press soft key [PASTE].

(4) Switch the display format:


Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
Press the rightmost soft key, and the soft key menu will change. Press soft key [+]. This allows you
to change the various settings for ladder diagram display.

- 62 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

Item
ADDRESS NOTATION

FUNCTION STYLE

SHOW COMMENT OF
CONTACT

SHOW COMMENT OF
COIL

SHOW CURSOR

SUBPROGRAM NET
NUMBER

WRAP SEARCH
ENABLED

PROGRAM LIST
ORDER
FRAME NET ON
SUBPROGRAM
DISPLAY
HEAVY LINES IN
LADDER DIAGRAM
ON/OFF CHANGE OF
RELAY SHAPE

ADDRESS COLOR
DIAGRAM COLOR
ACTIVE RELAY COLOR
PARAMETER COLOR
COMMENT COLOR

Description
Used to specify whether to display addresses in the ladder diagram as symbols or
addresses. Those addresses for which no symbols have been defined will always be
displayed as addresses.
Used to switch the functional instruction display format.
COMPACT: Reduces the functional instruction display area to a minimum. The
address parameter monitor is not displayed.
WIDE:
Reserves a wide area for displaying the current address parameter value
monitor.
TALL:
Reserves a tall area for displaying the current address parameter value
monitor.
Used to switch the format in which comments are to be displayed below contacts.
NONE: Displays no comments. This allows more contacts to be displayed on the
screen.
1 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 1-line format.
2 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 2-line format.
Used to specify whether to display comments at coil positions.
YES: Displays comments on the right of the ladder diagram.
NO: Displays no comments. This allows more relays to be displayed horizontally.
Comments can be displayed.
Used to specify whether to display the cursor.
YES: Displays the cursor. The cursor movement keys are sued to move the cursor.
For a search, the cursor will move to a found object such as a relay.
NO: Does not display the cursor. The up and down cursor movement keys are used
to directly move the screen display position.
Used to select a method of assigning numbers to the nets to be displayed.
LOCAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of the subprogram currently opened. The net
number display is the display range/number of nets in the entire subprogram
currently opened.
GLOBAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of all ladder programs (second PMC). The net
number display is the display range/subprogram range.
Used to specify whether to continue the search starting at the beginning of the ladder
program when the end of the ladder program is reached in a search process.
YES: If the end of the ladder program is reached in a forward search, continues the
search at the beginning. If the beginning is reached in a backward search,
continues the search at the end.
NO: At the point when the end or beginning of the ladder program is reached,
assumes the search to be a failure if no match is found, displaying an error
message.
Used to specify whether to display the subprograms on the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR
screen in the order of program numbers or symbols.
Used to specify whether to display functional instructions END1, END2, SP, and SPE
when the contents of a program are displayed using the [ZOOM] key on the
PROGRAM LIST MONITOR/EDITOR screen.
Used to specify the thickness of the lines in the ladder diagram.
YES: Uses heavy lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little larger.
NO: Uses light lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little smaller.
Used to specify whether to change the shape of each relay according to its status.
YES: Changes the shape of each relay according to its status. This setting is valid
only when "HEAVY LINES IN LADDER DIAGRAM" is set to "YES".
NO: Does not change the shape of each relay.
Used to set the color of symbols and addresses.
Used to set the color of the ladder diagram.
Used to set the color of a relay when it is ON.
Used to set the color of functional instruction parameters in the monitor display section.
Used to set the color of comments.

- 63 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

Pressing soft key [INIT] causes all settings to be changed to their defaults. After changing settings,
press soft key [EXIT] to return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR or NET EDITOR screen.
(5) Search for an instruction:
Press soft key [SEARCH]. This changes the soft key menu.

Item
TOPBTM
SEARCH

W-SRCH
F-SRCH
PREV
NEXT
GLOBAL

Description
Causes a jump to the beginning of the ladder program. If the beginning is already displayed,
causes a jump to the end.
Searches for the address or net number corresponding to an entered character string, displaying
it if it is found. If a number is entered, the system interprets it as a net number.
If a character string other than a number is entered, the system examines to see if the character
string has been defined as a symbol. If it has been defined as a symbol, the system searches for
the address represented by that symbol. If it has not been defined as a symbol, the system
interprets it as a character string representing an address. If succeeding in interpreting it
correctly, the system searches for the address.
Searches for the write coil in which the entered character string is used.
Accepts a functional instruction No. or functional instruction name as input and searches for the
functional instruction.
Repeats the last successful search operation in the backward direction.
Repeats the last successful search operation in the forward direction.
Switches the search target between all ladder programs (second PMC) and the subprogram
currently opened. The current search target is displayed at the rightmost position.
The system ladder programs (LV1, LV2, P1-P1499) are protected, so that the system ladder
programs cannot be search targets even if "GLOBAL" is selected.

Pressing soft key [EXIT] causes the search menu to be exited.

- 64 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

8.3

EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES


CAUTION
English messages are set in this section because the multi-language display
function is used for ladder messages.

Press the emergency stop button.


Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].

Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)

Press soft key [MESAGE].

Press soft key [(OPRT)].

Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state).

The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES].
(The ladder program stops.)

- 65 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

The MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.

Use soft key [SEARCH], <page> keys and the <cursor> keys appropriately to search for the address to
which a message is to be entered.

- 66 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

Position the cursor on the target address and press soft key [ZOOM].

Position the cursor on the number setting field and enter the alarm or message number. Move the cursor
to the message setting field, enter the message, and press soft key [EXIT ZOOM].
After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT].
The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed.
Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)

- 67 -

8.EDITING

8.4

B-85314EN-1/01

EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS

Press the emergency stop button.


Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].

Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)

Press soft key [SYMBOL].

Press oft key [(OPRT)].

Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)

The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES].
(The ladder program stops.)

- 68 -

8.EDITING

B-85314EN-1/01

The SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.

If you want to change a symbol or comment at an address, use soft key [SEARCH].
If you want to add a new symbol or comment, use soft key [NEW ENTRY].
Move the cursor to move the yellow cursor from the symbol field to the program field. Set required data
in each field.
After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT].
The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed.
Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)

- 69 -

8.EDITING

8.5

B-85314EN-1/01

ENDING AN EDITING SESSION

Edited ladder programs and other data are lost if you just turn the power off. After editing, write the data
to the flash ROM. Use the following procedure:
Press the emergency stop button.
Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].

Press soft key [I/O].

The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed.


Select the following items and press soft key [(OPRT)]:
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA

= PMC2
= FLASH ROM
= WRITE
= SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Press soft key [EXEC]. Writing edited data to the flash ROM starts.
"COMPLETE" is displayed to indicate completion.

- 70 -

9.CONFIRMATION

B-85314EN-1/01

CONFIRMATION

9.1

DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS

You can display the ladder program status screen. Use the following procedure:
Press soft key [PMC LADDER].

Press the soft key [(OPRT)].

Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if
necessary.)

Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.

- 71 -

9.CONFIRMATION

B-85314EN-1/01

Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key [ZOOM].
If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key
[LADDER] or press [(OPRT)] then [ZOOM]. The ladder diagram screen is displayed.

Soft key
LIST
SEARCH MENU
SWITCH
SWITCH PMC
SCREEN
SETING

Function
Lists ladder programs.
Displays the search menu in the soft key area.
Switches to the select monitor screen.
Switches to the first PMC, second PMC, and dual check.
Calls the setup screen of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
The settings are the same as those on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

- 72 -

9.CONFIRMATION

B-85314EN-1/01

9.2

SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS

You can display the logic status of each signal. Use the following procedure:
Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].

Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)

Press soft key [SIGNAL STATUS].


The SIGNAL STATUS screen is displayed.
"1" is displayed when the corresponding signal is ON. "0" is displayed when it is OFF.
Enter the address or symbol you want to reference and press soft keys [(OPRT)] [SEARCH], and
information for that address is displayed.

CAUTION
With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area.
If the second PMC is not selected, the signal status screen, when displayed,
does not display symbols set with the custom PMC. So, check that "2ND PMC"
is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.

- 73 -

10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

10

B-85314EN-1/01

SETTING PMC PARAMETERS


CAUTION
With this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. However, the
PMC parameters are common to the first PMC and second PMC. So, do not use
addresses other than the usable ones.

To set the parameters for timers, counters, keep relays, and data tables, use the following procedure:

(Switch the operation mode to MDI mode.)


Press

Press

or

(The CNC SETTING screen is displayed.)

Press soft key [SETTING].

Set "PARAMETER WRITE" to 1:ENABLE.

Press

or

(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.)

- 74 -

10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

B-85314EN-1/01

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again until the following soft keys are displayed.

For timers: Press soft key [TIMER].

Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the setting time.

- 75 -

10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

B-85314EN-1/01

For counters: Press soft key [COUNTR].

Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the value.

For keep relays: Press soft key [KEEP RELAY].

Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the values.

- 76 -

10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

B-85314EN-1/01

For data tables: Press soft key [DATA].

The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is displayed.


To change the data type, position the cursor on the TYPE field and change the setting.

Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [ZOOM].

Use the cursor and page keys and soft key [SEARCH] to move the cursor, and enter the value.

- 77 -

11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

B-85314EN-1/01

11

INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

11.1

OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN

Connect either a memory card or Handy File (RS-232C).

Press

or

(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.)

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again and press soft key [I/O].

The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed.

- 78 -

11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

B-85314EN-1/01

Input operation (from an external device to the ROBODRILL)


(1) Place the machine in the MDI mode and press the emergency stop button to place the machine in the
emergency stop state.
(2) On the I/O DATA screen, move the item and data selection cursors and make the following settings:
Setting item
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA
FILE NAME

Data
PMC2
MEMORY CARD / FLOPPY
READ
(Cannot be specified.)
The type of read data is automatically determined
Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the file name
with up to three characters for the extension).
Pressing [(OPRT)] [LIST] displays a list of files on the memory card. Position
the cursor on the file you want to read and press the [SELECT] key to select the
file.

(3) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Reading the file starts.
When an attempt is made to read a file, the following message is displayed, asking whether to read
the file:
READING MESSAGE DATA (SEQUENCE PROGRAM) (PMC2)
<CAUTION>Special care must be exercised to read a sequence program or PMC parameters.
*
Reading an inappropriate file may cause unexpected operation of the machine.
*
When a sequence program is read during operation, the program automatically stops.
Do you want to read this file?

To continue with the operation, press the [EXEC] key.


(The ladder program being executed automatically stops.)
(4) After the completion of reading in step <3>, write each type of data to the flash ROM. Make the
following settings:
Setting item
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA
FILE NAME

Data
PMC2
FLASH ROM
WRITE
SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data)
MESSAGES (for message data)
(Not set)

(5) Press the [(OPRT)] key [EXEC] key to execute data writing. "COMPLETE" is displayed to
indicate completion.

WARNING
When data is read during the execution of a ladder program, the ladder program
automatically stops. Special care must be exercised to stop a ladder program.
If a ladder program is stopped at an inappropriate timing or in an inappropriate
machine state, the machine may perform unexpected operation. In the ladder
program stopped state, the safety mechanism and monitoring functions of the
ladder program also stop. Be sure to confirm that "the machine is in an
appropriate state" and that "no one is near the machine" before stopping the
ladder program.

- 79 -

11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

B-85314EN-1/01

On the PMC I/O DATA screen, pressing soft keys [(OPRT)] [PORT SETTING] displays the
communication setting screen.

Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device)


(1) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device)
Setting item
PMC
DEVICE
FUNCTION
KIND OF DATA
FILE NAME

Data
PMC2
MEMORY CARD/FLOPPY
WRITE
SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data)
MESSAGES (for message data)
Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the
file name with up to three characters for the extension).
Pressing [(OPRT)] [NEW FILE] specifies:
PMC2_LAD.000 (for ladder data)
PMC2_MSG.000 (for message data)

(2) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Outputting a message file starts, with the specified
file name.

CAUTION
No message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, no
message file can be output.

- 80 -

11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

B-85314EN-1/01

11.2

OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN

(1) Turn the power OFF.


(2) Insert a memory card into the memory card insertion slot located on the left side of the LCD. (Make
sure that the label on the memory card is facing to the right, and push it in until it snaps into place.)
(3) Press and hold down the soft keys shown in the figure below, and turn on the power ON.
(Keep holding down the keys until the screen shown under (4) is displayed.)

[Turn power ON while holding them down]


(4) The boot screen is displayed.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

60W4 - 05

1.END
2.USER DATA LOADING
3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING
4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK
5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE
6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
7.SRAM DATA UTILITY
8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(5) Input operation (from a memory card to the ROBODRILL)


(a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "2.USER DATA
LOADING" and press the [SELECT] key.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123)
1 PMC2.MEM
131200 2011-09-26 08:56
2 PMC2_MSG.MEM 131200 2011-09-26 08:58
3 END

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(b) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press
[SELECT]:
Example:
"PMC2.MEM" (for ladder data)
"PMC2_MSG.MEM" (for message data)
(c) When a file is selected, the message "LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO" is displayed,
asking whether to read the file. Press [YES].
- 81 -

11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

B-85314EN-1/01

(d) When reading terminates normally, the message "LOADING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT
KEY." is displayed. Press the [SELECT] key.
(e) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select "END" and press the [SELECT] key. You exit the
SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
(6) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to a memory card)
(a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "6.SYSTEM DATA
SAVE" and press the [SELECT] key.
(b) On the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen, press the rightmost soft key [>] and display the page
containing either of the following items:
"PMC2" (for ladder data)
"M2PMCMSG" (for message data)
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
FROM DIRECTORY
1 NC BAS-1(0008)
2 NC BAS-2(0008)
3 NC BAS-3(0008)
4 NC BAS-4(0008)
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B
(0006)
7 PMC1
(0003)
8 END
*** MESSAGE ***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES

][

NO

][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(c) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press
[SELECT]:
"PMC2" (for ladder data)
"M2PMCMSG" (for message data)
(d) The confirmation message "SYSTEM DATA SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed.
Press [YES]. Outputting the message file starts.
(e) When the output to the memory card terminates normally, the following message is displayed.
Press the [SELECT] key.
"FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY."
"SAVE FILE NAME : PMC2.000" (for ladder data)
"SAVE FILE NAME : M2PMCMSG.000" (for messages)
When the memory card contains a file with the same name, the number of the extension is
incremented by one. (***.001 - ***.002)
(f) Position the cursor on "END" and press the [SELECT] key to exit the SYSTEM DATA SAVE
screen.

- 82 -

11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

B-85314EN-1/01

(7) Existing the boot screen


Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on "1.END" and press the [SELECT] key.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

60W4 - 05

1.END
2.USER DATA LOADING
3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING
4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK
5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE
6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
7.SRAM DATA UTILITY
8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed. Press the [YES]
key. This causes you to exit the boot screen, displaying the CNC or QUICK screen.

CAUTION
No message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore,
M2PMCMSG cannot be output.

- 83 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12
Address

B-85314EN-1/01

INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
[System ladder Custom ladder]
Function

Symbol

Note

R 1300.0
R 1300.1
R 1300.2

SI0_0
SI0_1
SI0_2

R 1300.3
R 1300.4
R 1300.5
R 1300.6
R 1300.7

SI0_3
SI0_4
SI0_5
SI0_6
SI0_7

Always ON.
Always OFF.
ON in a single scanning cycle at the start of
operation.
1.0-second clock pulse
0.1-second clock pulse
0.5-second clock pulse
(Not used)
(Not used)

R 1301.0
R 1301.1
R 1301.2
R 1301.3
R 1301.4
R 1301.5
R 1301.6
R 1301.7

SI1_0
SI1_1
SI1_2
SI1_3
SI1_4
SI1_5
SI1_6
SI1_7

(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)

R 1302.0
R 1302.1
R 1302.2
R 1302.3
R 1302.4
R 1302.5
R 1302.6
R 1302.7

SI2_0
SI2_1
SI2_2
SI2_3
SI2_4
SI2_5
SI2_6
SI2_7

Selected program No. 20


Selected program No. 21
Selected program No. 22
Selected program No. 23
Selected program No. 24
Selected program No. 25
Selected program No. 26
Selected program No. 27

12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2

R 1303.0
R 1303.1
R 1303.2
R 1303.3
R 1303.4
R 1303.5
R 1303.6
R 1303.7

SI3_0
SI3_1
SI3_2
SI3_3
SI3_4
SI3_5
SI3_6
SI3_7

Selected program No. 28


Selected program No. 29
Selected program No. 210
Selected program No. 211
Selected program No. 212
Selected program No. 213
Selected program No. 214
Selected program No. 215

12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2

R 1304.0
R 1304.1
R 1304.2
R 1304.3
R 1304.4
R 1304.5
R 1304.6
R 1304.7

SI4_0
SI4_1
SI4_2
SI4_3
SI4_4
SI4_5
SI4_6
SI4_7

Tool No. 20
Tool No. 21
Tool No. 22
Tool No. 23
Tool No. 24
Tool No. 25
Tool No. 26
Tool No. 27

12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2

- 84 -

12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

Symbol

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1305.0
R 1305.1
R 1305.2
R 1305.3
R 1305.4
R 1305.5
R 1305.6
R 1305.7

SI5_0
SI5_1
SI5_2
SI5_3
SI5_4
SI5_5
SI5_6
SI5_7

/M code BCD 20*1


M80 output/M code BCD 21*1
M81 output/M code BCD 22*1
M82 output/M code BCD 23*1
M83 output/M code BCD 20*10
M84 output/M code BCD 21*10
M85 output/M code BCD 22*10
M86 output/M code BCD 23*10

12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6

R 1306.0
R 1306.1
R 1306.2
R 1306.3
R 1306.4
R 1306.5
R 1306.6
R 1306.7

SI6_0
SI6_1
SI6_2
SI6_3
SI6_4
SI6_5
SI6_6
SI6_7

M87 output/data read request


M88 output/distribution completion
M89 output/BCD data parity check

12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6
12.7/12.6

R 1307.0
R 1307.1
R 1307.2
R 1307.3
R 1307.4
R 1307.5
R 1307.6
R 1307.7

SI7_0
SI7_1
SI7_2
SI7_3
SI7_4
SI7_5
SI7_6
SI7_7

Machine status output 1 (END1 output)


Machine status output 2 (END2 output)
Machine status output 3 (END3 output)
Cycle start (in progress)
Condition of feed hold
Condition of alarm
Condition of reset
Condition of emergency stop

12.16
12.16
12.16
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2

R 1308.0
R 1308.1
R 1308.2
R 1308.3
R 1308.4
R 1308.5
R 1308.6
R 1308.7

SI8_0
SI8_1
SI8_2
SI8_3
SI8_4
SI8_5
SI8_6
SI8_7

MEM mode selection


MDI mode selection
Handle mode selection
Jog mode selection
Reference mode selection
Edit mode selection
Program stoppage
Production completion

12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.2
12.15

R 1309.0
R 1309.1
R 1309.2
R 1309.3
R 1309.4
R 1309.5
R 1309.6
R 1309.7

SI9_0
SI9_1
SI9_2
SI9_3
SI9_4
SI9_5
SI9_6
SI9_7

End of selection
(Reserved)
Battery alarm
End of program
Machine interior coolant output ON
Splash guard door closed state
Automatic side door closed state
Automatic side door open state

12.5

/M code BCD 20*100


/M code BCD 21*100
/M code BCD 22*100
/M code BCD 23*100

- 85 -

12.6
12.6
12.6
12.6

12.2
12.18
12.17
12.19
12.20
12.20

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

Symbol

B-85314EN-1/01

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1310.0
R 1310.1
R 1310.2
R 1310.3
R 1310.4
R 1310.5
R 1310.6
R 1310.7

SI10_0
SI10_1
SI10_2
SI10_3
SI10_4
SI10_5
SI10_6
SI10_7

Door open (M60)


Automatic door closed state
Automatic door open state
Warning level detection
Breakage level detection
Spindle stop
Auto mode
Tool life end (tool group)

12.3
12.3
12.3
12.21
12.21
12.22
12.2
12.11

R 1311.0
R 1311.1
R 1311.2
R 1311.3
R 1311.4
R 1311.5
R 1311.6
R 1311.7

SI11_0
SI11_1
SI11_2
SI11_3
SI11_4
SI11_5
SI11_6
SI11_7

Coolant output ON
Automatic door open request output
Automatic door close request output
Air blow output
Production completion 1
Production completion 2
Advance notice of tool life
Center through coolant output ON

12.17
12.3
12.3
12.17
12.15
12.15
12.11
12.17

R 1312.0
R 1312.1
R 1312.2
R 1312.3
R 1312.4
R 1312.5
R 1312.6
R 1312.7

SI12_0
SI12_1
SI12_2
SI12_3
SI12_4
SI12_5
SI12_6
SI12_7

Display in Japanese
Display in German
Display in French
(Reserved)
Display in Italian
Display in Korean
Display in Spanish
Display in English

12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23
12.23

R 1313.0
R 1313.1
R 1313.2
R 1313.3
R 1313.4
R 1313.5
R 1313.6
R 1313.7

SI13_0
SI13_1
SI13_2
SI13_3
SI13_4
SI13_5
SI13_6
SI13_7

Position switch 1
Position switch 2
Position switch 3
Position switch 4
Position switch 5
Position switch 6
Position switch 7
Position switch 8

12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24
12.24

R 1314.0
R 1314.1
R 1314.2
R 1314.3
R 1314.4
R 1314.5
R 1314.6
R 1314.7

SI14_0
SI14_1
SI14_2
SI14_3
SI14_4
SI14_5
SI14_6
SI14_7

Movement along the X-axis


Movement along the Y-axis
Movement along the Z-axis
Movement along the 4-th axis
Movement along the 5-th axis
Low air pressure

12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.2

Emergency stop button

12.2

- 86 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Symbol

Note

R 1315.0
R 1315.1
R 1315.2
R 1315.3
R 1315.4
R 1315.5
R 1315.6
R 1315.7

SI15_0
SI15_1
SI15_2
SI15_3
SI15_4
SI15_5
SI15_6
SI15_7

Completion of X-axis reference position return


Completion of Y-axis reference position return
Completion of Z-axis reference position return
Completion of 4th-axis reference position return
Completion of 5th-axis reference position return
Completion of machining
Feedrate override 100%
Spindle speed override 100%

R 1316.0
R 1316.1
R 1316.2
R 1316.3
R 1316.4
R 1316.5
R 1316.6
R 1316.7

SI16_0
SI16_1
SI16_2
SI16_3
SI16_4
SI16_5
SI16_6
SI16_7

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

R 1317.0
R 1317.1
R 1317.2
R 1317.3
R 1317.4
R 1317.5
R 1317.6
R 1317.7

SI17_0
SI17_1
SI17_2
SI17_3
SI17_4
SI17_5
SI17_6
SI17_7

Door open (M61)


Door open (M62)
Door open (M63)
Door open (M64)
Door open (M65)
Alarm output 2
Operation-enabled state
(Not used)

12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.3
12.10
12.2

R 1318.0
R 1318.1
R 1318.2
R 1318.3
R 1318.4
R 1318.5
R 1318.6
R 1318.7

SI18_0
SI18_1
SI18_2
SI18_3
SI18_4
SI18_5
SI18_6
SI18_7

Establishment of X-axis reference position


Establishment of Y-axis reference position
Establishment of Z-axis reference position
Establishment of 4th-axis reference position
Establishment of 5th-axis reference position
Tool group reset request reception
Tool group reset error

12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.11
12.11

R 1319.0

SI19_0

Completion of X-axis reference position return

R 1319.1

SI19_1

Completion of Y-axis reference position return

R 1319.2

SI19_2

Completion of Z-axis reference position return

R 1319.3

SI19_3

Completion of 4th-axis reference position return

R 1319.4

SI19_4

Completion of 5th-axis reference position return

(When ZPX is ON at the


completion of G27 or G28)
(When ZPY is ON at the
completion of G27 or G28)
(When ZPZ is ON at the
completion of G27 or G28)
(When ZP4 is ON at the completion
of G27 or G28)
(When ZP5 is ON at the completion
of G27 or G28)

R 1319.5
R 1319.6
R 1319.7

SI19_5
SI19_6
SI19_7

- 87 -

12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.18
12.2
12.2

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

Symbol

B-85314EN-1/01

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1320.0
R 1320.1
R 1320.2
R 1320.3
R 1320.4
R 1320.5
R 1320.6
R 1320.7

SI20_0
SI20_1
SI20_2
SI20_3
SI20_4
SI20_5
SI20_6
SI20_7

S command 2^0
S command 2^1
S command 2^2
S command 2^3
S command 2^4
S command 2^5
S command 2^6
S command 2^7

12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22

R 1321.0
R 1321.1
R 1321.2
R 1321.3
R 1321.4
R 1321.5
R 1321.6
R 1321.7

SI21_0
SI21_1
SI21_2
SI21_3
SI21_4
SI21_5
SI21_6
SI21_7

S command 2^8
S command 2^9
S command 2^10
S command 2^11
S command 2^12
S command 2^13
S command 2^14
S command 2^15

12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22

R 1322.0
R 1322.1
R 1322.2
R 1322.3
R 1322.4
R 1322.5
R 1322.6
R 1322.7

SI22_0
SI22_1
SI22_2
SI22_3
SI22_4
SI22_5
SI22_6
SI22_7

S command 2^16
S command 2^17
S command 2^18
S command 2^19
S command 2^20
S command 2^21
S command 2^22
S command 2^23

12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22

R 1323.0
R 1323.1
R 1323.2
R 1323.3
R 1323.4
R 1323.5
R 1323.6
R 1323.7

SI23_0
SI23_1
SI23_2
SI23_3
SI23_4
SI23_5
SI23_6
SI23_7

S command 2^24
S command 2^25
S command 2^26
S command 2^27
S command 2^28
S command 2^29
S command 2^30
S command 2^31

12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22
12.22

R 1324.0
R 1324.1
R 1324.2
R 1324.3
R 1324.4
R 1324.5
R 1324.6

SI24_0
SI24_1
SI24_2
SI24_3
SI24_4
SI24_5
SI24_6

M03 command
M05 command
Spindle rotation button ON
Center through coolant pump on
Center through coolant on
Air purge on
Automatic fire extinguishing device error

R 1324.7

SI24_7

Start of the automatic fire extinguishing device

12.22
12.22
12.22
12.17
12.17
12.17
ON when the automatic fire
extinguishing device is faulty or the
power is off. (Option)
ON when the automatic fire
extinguishing device starts.
(Option)

- 88 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

Symbol

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1325.0
R 1325.1
R 1325.2
R 1325.3
R 1325.4
R 1325.5
R 1325.6
R 1325.7

SI25_0
SI25_1
SI25_2
SI25_3
SI25_4
SI25_5
SI25_6
SI25_7

Input signal for custom macro (#1100)


Input signal for custom macro (#1101)
Input signal for custom macro (#1102)
Input signal for custom macro (#1103)
Input signal for custom macro (#1104)
Input signal for custom macro (#1105)
Input signal for custom macro (#1106)
Input signal for custom macro (#1107)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

R 1326.0
R 1326.1
R 1326.2
R 1326.3
R 1326.4
R 1326.5
R 1326.6
R 1326.7

SI26_0
SI26_1
SI26_2
SI26_3
SI26_4
SI26_5
SI26_6
SI26_7

Input signal for custom macro (#1108)


Input signal for custom macro (#1109)
Input signal for custom macro (#1110)
Input signal for custom macro (#1111)
Input signal for custom macro (#1112)
Input signal for custom macro (#1113)
Input signal for custom macro (#1114)
Input signal for custom macro (#1115)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

R 1327.0
R 1327.1
R 1327.2
R 1327.3
R 1327.4
R 1327.5
R 1327.6
R 1327.7

SI27_0
SI27_1
SI27_2
SI27_3
SI27_4
SI27_5
SI27_6
SI27_7

Input signal for custom macro (#1133)


Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

R 1328.0
R 1328.1
R 1328.2
R 1328.3
R 1328.4
R 1328.5
R 1328.6
R 1328.7

SI28_0
SI28_1
SI28_2
SI28_3
SI28_4
SI28_5
SI28_6
SI28_7

Input signal for custom macro (#1133)


Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

R 1329.0
R 1329.1
R 1329.2
R 1329.3
R 1329.4
R 1329.5
R 1329.6
R 1329.7

SI29_0
SI29_1
SI29_2
SI29_3
SI29_4
SI29_5
SI29_6
SI29_7

Input signal for custom macro (#1133)


Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

- 89 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

Symbol

B-85314EN-1/01

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1330.0
R 1330.1
R 1330.2
R 1330.3
R 1330.4
R 1330.5
R 1330.6
R 1330.7

SI30_0
SI30_1
SI30_2
SI30_3
SI30_4
SI30_5
SI30_6
SI30_7

Input signal for custom macro (#1133)


Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)
Input signal for custom macro (#1133)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

R 1331.0
R 1331.1
R 1331.2
R 1331.3
R 1331.4
R 1331.5
R 1331.6
R 1331.7

SI31_0
SI31_1
SI31_2
SI31_3
SI31_4
SI31_5
SI31_6
SI31_7

Clamp request (5th axis)


Unclamp request (5th axis)
Clamped (5th axis)
Clamp request (4th axis)
Unclamp request (4th axis)
Clamped (4th axis)

12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12

R 1332.0
R 1332.1
R 1332.2
R 1332.3
R 1332.4
R 1332.5
R 1332.6
R 1332.7

SI32_0
SI32_1
SI32_2
SI32_3
SI32_4
SI32_5
SI32_6
SI32_7

Selected tool group No. 2^0


Selected tool group No. 2^1
Selected tool group No. 2^2
Selected tool group No. 2^3
Selected tool group No. 2^4
Selected tool group No. 2^5
Selected tool group No. 2^6
Selected tool group No. 2^7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1333.0
R 1333.1
R 1333.2
R 1333.3
R 1333.4
R 1333.5
R 1333.6
R 1333.7

SI33_0
SI33_1
SI33_2
SI33_3
SI33_4
SI33_5
SI33_6
SI33_7

Tool life of group 1


Tool life of group 2
Tool life of group 3
Tool life of group 4
Tool life of group 5
Tool life of group 6
Tool life of group 7
Tool life of group 8

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1334.0
R 1334.1
R 1334.2
R 1334.3
R 1334.4
R 1334.5
R 1334.6
R 1334.7

SI34_0
SI34_1
SI34_2
SI34_3
SI34_4
SI34_5
SI34_6
SI34_7

Tool life of group 9


Tool life of group 10
Tool life of group 11
Tool life of group 12
Tool life of group 13
Tool life of group 14
Tool life of group 15
Tool life of group 16

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

- 90 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

Symbol

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1335.0
R 1335.1
R 1335.2
R 1335.3
R 1335.4
R 1335.5
R 1335.6
R 1335.7

SI35_0
SI35_1
SI35_2
SI35_3
SI35_4
SI35_5
SI35_6
SI35_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 1


Advance notice of tool life of group 2
Advance notice of tool life of group 3
Advance notice of tool life of group 4
Advance notice of tool life of group 5
Advance notice of tool life of group 6
Advance notice of tool life of group 7
Advance notice of tool life of group 8

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1336.0
R 1336.1
R 1336.2
R 1336.3
R 1336.4
R 1336.5
R 1336.6
R 1336.7

SI36_0
SI36_1
SI36_2
SI36_3
SI36_4
SI36_5
SI36_6
SI36_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 9


Advance notice of tool life of group 10
Advance notice of tool life of group 11
Advance notice of tool life of group 12
Advance notice of tool life of group 13
Advance notice of tool life of group 14
Advance notice of tool life of group 15
Advance notice of tool life of group 16

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1337.0
R 1337.1
R 1337.2
R 1337.3
R 1337.4
R 1337.5
R 1337.6
R 1337.7

SI37_0
SI37_1
SI37_2
SI37_3
SI37_4
SI37_5
SI37_6
SI37_7

Display in Chinese (Simplified)


Display in Portuguese
Display in Russian
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

12.23
12.23
12.23

R 1338.0
R 1338.1
R 1338.2
R 1338.3
R 1338.4
R 1338.5
R 1338.6
R 1338.7

SI38_0
SI38_1
SI38_2
SI38_3
SI38_4
SI38_5
SI38_6
SI38_7

Tool clamp signal


Tool change signal
Turret recovery mode
Single block
Rapid traverse LOW
Rapid traverse 25%
Rapid traverse 50%
Rapid traverse 100%

12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2
12.2

R 1339.0
R 1339.1

SI39_0
SI39_1

Tap return mode


Condition of reset

12.2
ON while the reset button on the
operator's panel is being pressed.

R 1339.2
R 1339.3
R 1339.4
R 1339.5
R 1339.6
R 1339.7

SI39_2
SI39_3
SI39_4
SI39_5
SI39_6
SI39_7

- 91 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

Symbol

B-85314EN-1/01

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1400.0
R 1400.1
R 1400.2
R 1400.3
R 1400.4
R 1400.5
R 1400.6
R 1400.7

SI50_0
SI50_1
SI50_2
SI50_3
SI50_4
SI50_5
SI50_6
SI50_7

Tool life of group 17


Tool life of group 18
Tool life of group 19
Tool life of group 20
Tool life of group 21
Tool life of group 22
Tool life of group 23
Tool life of group 24

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1401.0
R 1401.1
R 1401.2
R 1401.3
R 1401.4
R 1401.5
R 1401.6
R 1401.7

SI51_0
SI51_1
SI51_2
SI51_3
SI51_4
SI51_5
SI51_6
SI51_7

Tool life of group 25


Tool life of group 26
Tool life of group 27
Tool life of group 28
Tool life of group 29
Tool life of group 30
Tool life of group 31
Tool life of group 32

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1402.0
R 1402.1
R 1402.2
R 1402.3
R 1402.4
R 1402.5
R 1402.6
R 1402.7

SI52_0
SI52_1
SI52_2
SI52_3
SI52_4
SI52_5
SI52_6
SI52_7

Tool life of group 33


Tool life of group 34
Tool life of group 35
Tool life of group 36
Tool life of group 37
Tool life of group 38
Tool life of group 39
Tool life of group 40

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1403.0
R 1403.1
R 1403.2
R 1403.3
R 1403.4
R 1403.5
R 1403.6
R 1403.7

SI53_0
SI53_1
SI53_2
SI53_3
SI53_4
SI53_5
SI53_6
SI53_7

Tool life of group 41


Tool life of group 42
Tool life of group 43
Tool life of group 44
Tool life of group 45
Tool life of group 46
Tool life of group 47
Tool life of group 48

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1404.0
R 1404.1
R 1404.2
R 1404.3
R 1404.4
R 1404.5
R 1404.6
R 1404.7

SI54_0
SI54_1
SI54_2
SI54_3
SI54_4
SI54_5
SI54_6
SI54_7

Tool life of group 49


Tool life of group 50
Tool life of group 51
Tool life of group 52
Tool life of group 53
Tool life of group 54
Tool life of group 55
Tool life of group 56

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

- 92 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

Symbol

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1405.0
R 1405.1
R 1405.2
R 1405.3
R 1405.4
R 1405.5
R 1405.6
R 1405.7

SI55_0
SI55_1
SI55_2
SI55_3
SI55_4
SI55_5
SI55_6
SI55_7

Tool life of group 57


Tool life of group 58
Tool life of group 59
Tool life of group 60
Tool life of group 61
Tool life of group 62
Tool life of group 63
Tool life of group 64

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1406.0
R 1406.1
R 1406.2
R 1406.3
R 1406.4
R 1406.5
R 1406.6
R 1406.7

SI56_0
SI56_1
SI56_2
SI56_3
SI56_4
SI56_5
SI56_6
SI56_7

Tool life of group 65


Tool life of group 66
Tool life of group 67
Tool life of group 68
Tool life of group 69
Tool life of group 70
Tool life of group 71
Tool life of group 72

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1407.0
R 1407.1
R 1407.2
R 1407.3
R 1407.4
R 1407.5
R 1407.6
R 1407.7

SI57_0
SI57_1
SI57_2
SI57_3
SI57_4
SI57_5
SI57_6
SI57_7

Tool life of group 73


Tool life of group 74
Tool life of group 75
Tool life of group 76
Tool life of group 77
Tool life of group 78
Tool life of group 79
Tool life of group 80

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1408.0
R 1408.1
R 1408.2
R 1408.3
R 1408.4
R 1408.5
R 1408.6
R 1408.7

SI58_0
SI58_1
SI58_2
SI58_3
SI58_4
SI58_5
SI58_6
SI58_7

Tool life of group 81


Tool life of group 82
Tool life of group 83
Tool life of group 84
Tool life of group 85
Tool life of group 86
Tool life of group 87
Tool life of group 88

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1409.0
R 1409.1
R 1409.2
R 1409.3
R 1409.4
R 1409.5
R 1409.6
R 1409.7

SI59_0
SI59_1
SI59_2
SI59_3
SI59_4
SI59_5
SI59_6
SI59_7

Tool life of group 89


Tool life of group 90
Tool life of group 91
Tool life of group 92
Tool life of group 93
Tool life of group 94
Tool life of group 95
Tool life of group 96

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

- 93 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

Symbol

B-85314EN-1/01

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1410.0
R 1410.1
R 1410.2
R 1410.3
R 1410.4
R 1410.5
R 1410.6
R 1410.7

SI60_0
SI60_1
SI60_2
SI60_3
SI60_4
SI60_5
SI60_6
SI60_7

Tool life of group 97


Tool life of group 98
Tool life of group 99
Tool life of group 100
Tool life of group 101
Tool life of group 102
Tool life of group 103
Tool life of group 104

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1411.0
R 1411.1
R 1411.2
R 1411.3
R 1411.4
R 1411.5
R 1411.6
R 1411.7

SI61_0
SI61_1
SI61_2
SI61_3
SI61_4
SI61_5
SI61_6
SI61_7

Tool life of group 105


Tool life of group 106
Tool life of group 107
Tool life of group 108
Tool life of group 109
Tool life of group 110
Tool life of group 111
Tool life of group 112

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1412.0
R 1412.1
R 1412.2
R 1412.3
R 1412.4
R 1412.5
R 1412.6
R 1412.7

SI62_0
SI62_1
SI62_2
SI62_3
SI62_4
SI62_5
SI62_6
SI62_7

Tool life of group 113


Tool life of group 114
Tool life of group 115
Tool life of group 116
Tool life of group 117
Tool life of group 118
Tool life of group 119
Tool life of group 120

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1413.0
R 1413.1
R 1413.2
R 1413.3
R 1413.4
R 1413.5
R 1413.6
R 1413.7

SI63_0
SI63_1
SI63_2
SI63_3
SI63_4
SI63_5
SI63_6
SI63_7

Tool life of group 121


Tool life of group 122
Tool life of group 123
Tool life of group 124
Tool life of group 125
Tool life of group 126
Tool life of group 127
Tool life of group 128

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1414.0
R 1414.1
R 1414.2
R 1414.3
R 1414.4
R 1414.5
R 1414.6
R 1414.7

SI64_0
SI64_1
SI64_2
SI64_3
SI64_4
SI64_5
SI64_6
SI64_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 17


Advance notice of tool life of group 18
Advance notice of tool life of group 19
Advance notice of tool life of group 20
Advance notice of tool life of group 21
Advance notice of tool life of group 22
Advance notice of tool life of group 23
Advance notice of tool life of group 24

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

- 94 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

Symbol

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1415.0
R 1415.1
R 1415.2
R 1415.3
R 1415.4
R 1415.5
R 1415.6
R 1415.7

SI65_0
SI65_1
SI65_2
SI65_3
SI65_4
SI65_5
SI65_6
SI65_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 25


Advance notice of tool life of group 26
Advance notice of tool life of group 27
Advance notice of tool life of group 28
Advance notice of tool life of group 29
Advance notice of tool life of group 30
Advance notice of tool life of group 31
Advance notice of tool life of group 32

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1416.0
R 1416.1
R 1416.2
R 1416.3
R 1416.4
R 1416.5
R 1416.6
R 1416.7

SI66_0
SI66_1
SI66_2
SI66_3
SI66_4
SI66_5
SI66_6
SI66_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 33


Advance notice of tool life of group 34
Advance notice of tool life of group 35
Advance notice of tool life of group 36
Advance notice of tool life of group 37
Advance notice of tool life of group 38
Advance notice of tool life of group 39
Advance notice of tool life of group 40

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1417.0
R 1417.1
R 1417.2
R 1417.3
R 1417.4
R 1417.5
R 1417.6
R 1417.7

SI67_0
SI67_1
SI67_2
SI67_3
SI67_4
SI67_5
SI67_6
SI67_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 41


Advance notice of tool life of group 42
Advance notice of tool life of group 43
Advance notice of tool life of group 44
Advance notice of tool life of group 45
Advance notice of tool life of group 46
Advance notice of tool life of group 47
Advance notice of tool life of group 48

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1418.0
R 1418.1
R 1418.2
R 1418.3
R 1418.4
R 1418.5
R 1418.6
R 1418.7

SI68_0
SI68_1
SI68_2
SI68_3
SI68_4
SI68_5
SI68_6
SI68_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 49


Advance notice of tool life of group 50
Advance notice of tool life of group 51
Advance notice of tool life of group 52
Advance notice of tool life of group 53
Advance notice of tool life of group 54
Advance notice of tool life of group 55
Advance notice of tool life of group 56

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1419.0
R 1419.1
R 1419.2
R 1419.3
R 1419.4
R 1419.5
R 1419.6
R 1419.7

SI69_0
SI69_1
SI69_2
SI69_3
SI69_4
SI69_5
SI69_6
SI69_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 57


Advance notice of tool life of group 58
Advance notice of tool life of group 59
Advance notice of tool life of group 60
Advance notice of tool life of group 61
Advance notice of tool life of group 62
Advance notice of tool life of group 63
Advance notice of tool life of group 64

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

- 95 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

Symbol

B-85314EN-1/01

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1420.0
R 1420.1
R 1420.2
R 1420.3
R 1420.4
R 1420.5
R 1420.6
R 1420.7

SI70_0
SI70_1
SI70_2
SI70_3
SI70_4
SI70_5
SI70_6
SI70_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 65


Advance notice of tool life of group 66
Advance notice of tool life of group 67
Advance notice of tool life of group 68
Advance notice of tool life of group 69
Advance notice of tool life of group 70
Advance notice of tool life of group 71
Advance notice of tool life of group 72

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1421.0
R 1421.1
R 1421.2
R 1421.3
R 1421.4
R 1421.5
R 1421.6
R 1421.7

SI71_0
SI71_1
SI71_2
SI71_3
SI71_4
SI71_5
SI71_6
SI71_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 73


Advance notice of tool life of group 74
Advance notice of tool life of group 75
Advance notice of tool life of group 76
Advance notice of tool life of group 77
Advance notice of tool life of group 78
Advance notice of tool life of group 79
Advance notice of tool life of group 80

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1422.0
R 1422.1
R 1422.2
R 1422.3
R 1422.4
R 1422.5
R 1422.6
R 1422.7

SI72_0
SI72_1
SI72_2
SI72_3
SI72_4
SI72_5
SI72_6
SI72_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 81


Advance notice of tool life of group 82
Advance notice of tool life of group 83
Advance notice of tool life of group 84
Advance notice of tool life of group 85
Advance notice of tool life of group 86
Advance notice of tool life of group 87
Advance notice of tool life of group 88

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1423.0
R 1423.1
R 1423.2
R 1423.3
R 1423.4
R 1423.5
R 1423.6
R 1423.7

SI73_0
SI73_1
SI73_2
SI73_3
SI73_4
SI73_5
SI73_6
SI73_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 89


Advance notice of tool life of group 90
Advance notice of tool life of group 91
Advance notice of tool life of group 92
Advance notice of tool life of group 93
Advance notice of tool life of group 94
Advance notice of tool life of group 95
Advance notice of tool life of group 96

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1424.0
R 1424.1
R 1424.2
R 1424.3
R 1424.4
R 1424.5
R 1424.6
R 1424.7

SI74_0
SI74_1
SI74_2
SI74_3
SI74_4
SI74_5
SI74_6
SI74_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 97


Advance notice of tool life of group 98
Advance notice of tool life of group 99
Advance notice of tool life of group 100
Advance notice of tool life of group 101
Advance notice of tool life of group 102
Advance notice of tool life of group 103
Advance notice of tool life of group 104

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

- 96 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

Symbol

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Note

R 1425.0
R 1425.1
R 1425.2
R 1425.3
R 1425.4
R 1425.5
R 1425.6
R 1425.7

SI75_0
SI75_1
SI75_2
SI75_3
SI75_4
SI75_5
SI75_6
SI75_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 105


Advance notice of tool life of group 106
Advance notice of tool life of group 107
Advance notice of tool life of group 108
Advance notice of tool life of group 109
Advance notice of tool life of group 110
Advance notice of tool life of group 111
Advance notice of tool life of group 112

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1426.0
R 1426.1
R 1426.2
R 1426.3
R 1426.4
R 1426.5
R 1426.6
R 1426.7

SI76_0
SI76_1
SI76_2
SI76_3
SI76_4
SI76_5
SI76_6
SI76_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 113


Advance notice of tool life of group 114
Advance notice of tool life of group 115
Advance notice of tool life of group 116
Advance notice of tool life of group 117
Advance notice of tool life of group 118
Advance notice of tool life of group 119
Advance notice of tool life of group 120

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1427.0
R 1427.1
R 1427.2
R 1427.3
R 1427.4
R 1427.5
R 1427.6
R 1427.7

SI77_0
SI77_1
SI77_2
SI77_3
SI77_4
SI77_5
SI77_6
SI77_7

Advance notice of tool life of group 121


Advance notice of tool life of group 122
Advance notice of tool life of group 123
Advance notice of tool life of group 124
Advance notice of tool life of group 125
Advance notice of tool life of group 126
Advance notice of tool life of group 127
Advance notice of tool life of group 128

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

R 1428.0
R 1428.1
R 1428.2
R 1428.3
R 1428.4
R 1428.5
R 1428.6
R 1428.7

SI78_0
SI78_1
SI78_2
SI78_3
SI78_4
SI78_5
SI78_6
SI78_7

Robot system being started


Cycle stop mode
System stop mode
System start
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33

R 1429.0
R 1429.1

SI79_0
SI79_1

(Reserved)
Taper cleaning coolant ON signal

R 1429.2

SI79_2

Machining coolant ON signal

R 1429.3
R 1429.4
R 1429.5
R 1429.6
R 1429.7

SI79_3
SI79_4
SI79_5
SI79_6
SI79_7

Teach mode signal


Front door open signal
Interaction mode signal

- 97 -

When the taper cleaning coolant


valve and pump are ON
When the machining coolant valve
and pump are ON
12.33
12.33
12.33

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Function

Symbol

R 1430.0
R 1430.1
R 1430.2
R 1430.3

SI80_0
SI80_1
SI80_2
SI80_3

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Probe signal error

R 1430.4
R 1430.5
R 1430.6
R 1430.7

SI80_4
SI80_5
SI80_6
SI80_7

(Reserved)

R 1431.0

SI81_0

R 1431.1

SI81_1

R 1431.2

SI81_2

R 1431.3

SI81_3

R 1431.4
R 1431.5

SI81_4
SI81_5

R 1431.6
R 1431.7

SI81_6
SI81_7

When menu operation "1. TOOL CHANGE" is


selected
When menu operation "2. AXES MOVEMENT" is
selected
When menu operation "3. SPINDLE REV." is
selected
When menu operation "4. REF. POINT" is
selected
When menu operation "5. CANCEL" is selected
When menu operation "6. EXT. SIGNAL" is
selected
When menu operation "7. CLAMP" is selected
When menu operation "8. NC LANGUAGE" is
selected

R 1432.0

SI82_0

R 1432.1

SI82_1

R 1432.2

SI82_2

R 1432.3

SI82_3

R 1432.4

SI82_4

R 1432.5

SI82_5

R 1432.6

SI82_6

R 1432.7

SI82_7

B-85314EN-1/01

Note

ON when a touch probe failure is


detected between M38 and M39.

Error signal at tool registration/runout


measurement
Excessive tool runout signal

- 98 -

ON when a failure is detected (tool


runout detection function).
ON when there is excessive tool
runout (tool runout detection
function).

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

[CNC Custom ladder]


Function

Symbol

Note

F 0010.0
F 0010.1
F 0010.2
F 0010.3
F 0010.4
F 0010.5
F 0010.6
F 0010.7

M code 2^0
M code 2^1
M code 2^2
M code 2^3
M code 2^4
M code 2^5
M code 2^6
M code 2^7

12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27

F 0011.0
F 0011.1
F 0011.2
F 0011.3
F 0011.4
F 0011.5
F 0011.6
F 0011.7

M code 2^8
M code 2^9
M code 2^10
M code 2^11
M code 2^12
M code 2^13
M code 2^14
M code 2^15

12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27

F 0012.0
F 0012.1
F 0012.2
F 0012.3
F 0012.4
F 0012.5
F 0012.6
F 0012.7

M code 2^16
M code 2^17
M code 2^18
M code 2^19
M code 2^20
M code 2^21
M code 2^22
M code 2^23

12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27

F 0013.0
F 0013.1
F 0013.2
F 0013.3
F 0013.4
F 0013.5
F 0013.6
F 0013.7

M code 2^24
M code 2^25
M code 2^26
M code 2^27
M code 2^28
M code 2^29
M code 2^30
M code 2^31

12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27
12.27

- 99 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

Symbol

B-85314EN-1/01

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Function
Workpiece No./program No. search 2^0*1
Workpiece No./program No. search 2^1*1
Workpiece No./program No. search 2^2*1
Workpiece No./program No. search 2^3*1
/Program No. search 2^0*10
/Program No. search 2^1*10
/Program No. search 2^2*10
/Program No. search 2^3*10

Note

R 1350.0
R 1350.1
R 1350.2
R 1350.3
R 1350.4
R 1350.5
R 1350.6
R 1350.7

SO0_0
SO0_1
SO0_2
SO0_3
SO0_4
SO0_5
SO0_6
SO0_7

R 1351.0
R 1351.1
R 1351.2
R 1351.3
R 1351.4
R 1351.5
R 1351.6
R 1351.7

SO1_0
SO1_1
SO1_2
SO1_3
SO1_4
SO1_5
SO1_6
SO1_7

R 1352.0
R 1352.1
R 1352.2
R 1352.3
R 1352.4
R 1352.5
R 1352.6
R 1352.7

SO2_0
SO2_1
SO2_2
SO2_3
SO2_4
SO2_5
SO2_6
SO2_7

Data read request


External start
External hold
External reset
External emergency stop
Completion (FIN)
Single block mode ON
Dry run mode ON

12.5
12.28
12.28
12.28
12.28
12.6
12.28
12.28

R 1353.0
R 1353.1
R 1353.2
R 1353.3
R 1353.4
R 1353.5
R 1353.6
R 1353.7

SO3_0
SO3_1
SO3_2
SO3_3
SO3_4
SO3_5
SO3_6
SO3_7

Door close request


External door open control
External door close control
DNC operation
Custom macro interrupt
Reset & rewind
Automatic side door open request
Automatic side door close request

12.3
12.3
12.3
12.28
12.8
12.9
12.20
12.20

R 1354.0

SO4_0

12.13

R 1354.1
R 1354.2
R 1354.3
R 1354.4
R 1354.5
R 1354.6
R 1354.7

SO4_1
SO4_2
SO4_3
SO4_4
SO4_5
SO4_6
SO4_7

Disabling of machine operator's panel start


button
X-axis interlock
Y-axis interlock
Z-axis interlock
4-th axis interlock
5-th axis interlock
Door interlock
(Reserved)

/Program No. search 2^0*100


/Program No. search 2^1*100
/Program No. search 2^2*100
/Program No. search 2^3*100
/Program No. search 2^0*1000
/Program No. search 2^1*1000
/Program No. search 2^2*1000
/Program No. search 2^3*1000

- 100 -

12.4/12.5
12.4/12.5
12.4/12.5
12.4/12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5

12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.25
12.20

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Function

Symbol

Note

R 1355.0
R 1355.1
R 1355.2
R 1355.3
R 1355.4
R 1355.5
R 1355.6
R 1355.7

SO5_0
SO5_1
SO5_2
SO5_3
SO5_4
SO5_5
SO5_6
SO5_7

Alarm message display in progress


Operator message display in progress
Machine status output 1 request
Machine status output 2 request
Machine status output 3 request
Disabling of ROBODRILL operator's panel
Operator message display in progress 2
Lamp check function ON

R 1356.0
R 1356.1
R 1356.2
R 1356.3
R 1356.4
R 1356.5
R 1356.6
R 1356.7

SO6_0
SO6_1
SO6_2
SO6_3
SO6_4
SO6_5
SO6_6
SO6_7

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

R 1357.0
R 1357.1
R 1357.2
R 1357.3
R 1357.4
R 1357.5
R 1357.6
R 1357.7

SO7_0
SO7_1
SO7_2
SO7_3
SO7_4
SO7_5
SO7_6
SO7_7

Tool breakage
Block skip ON (/, /1)
Switching of operation mode (to MEM mode)
Switching of operation mode (to MDI mode)
Switching of operation mode (to handle mode)
Switching of operation mode (to edit mode)
Machine interior lamp ON
Machine interior cleaning coolant control

12.11
12.35
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.14
12.30
12.17

R 1358.0
R 1358.1
R 1358.2
R 1358.3
R 1358.4
R 1358.5
R 1358.6
R 1358.7

SO8_0
SO8_1
SO8_2
SO8_3
SO8_4
SO8_5
SO8_6
SO8_7

4-axis clamp (M10) signal output command


4-axis unclamp (M11) signal output command
5-axis clamp (M68) signal output command
5-axis unclamp (M69) signal output command
Counter 1 (production count) reset
Counter 1 (total production count) reset
Counter 2 (production count) reset
Counter 2 (total production count) reset

12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12
12.15
12.15
12.15
12.15

R 1359.0
R 1359.1
R 1359.2
R 1359.3
R 1359.4
R 1359.5
R 1359.6
R 1359.7

SO9_0
SO9_1
SO9_2
SO9_3
SO9_4
SO9_5
SO9_6
SO9_7

Counter screen display

12.15

Alarm output 2 stoppage


Door unlock
Tool group reset request
Power OFF request
No spindle rotating
Low air pressure message cancel

12.10
12.19
12.11
12.31
12.22
The message is not displayed
when this signal is ON.

- 101 -

12.29
12.29
12.16
12.16
12.16
12.13
12.29
12.13

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
Address

B-85314EN-1/01

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Function

Symbol

Note

R 1360.0
R 1360.1
R 1360.2
R 1360.3
R 1360.4
R 1360.5
R 1360.6
R 1360.7

SO10_0
SO10_1
SO10_2
SO10_3
SO10_4
SO10_5
SO10_6
SO10_7

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

R 1361.0
R 1361.1
R 1361.2
R 1361.3
R 1361.4
R 1361.5
R 1361.6
R 1361.7

SO11_0
SO11_1
SO11_2
SO11_3
SO11_4
SO11_5
SO11_6
SO11_7

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

R 1362.0
R 1362.1
R 1362.2
R 1362.3
R 1362.4
R 1362.5
R 1362.6
R 1362.7

SO12_0
SO12_1
SO12_2
SO12_3
SO12_4
SO12_5
SO12_6
SO12_7

Output signal for custom macro (#1000)


Output signal for custom macro (#1001)
Output signal for custom macro (#1002)
Output signal for custom macro (#1003)
Output signal for custom macro (#1004)
Output signal for custom macro (#1005)
Output signal for custom macro (#1006)
Output signal for custom macro (#1007)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

R 1363.0
R 1363.1
R 1363.2
R 1363.3
R 1363.4
R 1363.5
R 1363.6
R 1363.7

SO13_0
SO13_1
SO13_2
SO13_3
SO13_4
SO13_5
SO13_6
SO13_7

Output signal for custom macro (#1008)


Output signal for custom macro (#1009)
Output signal for custom macro (#1010)
Output signal for custom macro (#1011)
Output signal for custom macro (#1012)
Output signal for custom macro (#1013)
Output signal for custom macro (#1014)
Output signal for custom macro (#1015)

12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26
12.26

R 1364.0
R 1364.1
R 1364.2
R 1364.3
R 1364.4
R 1364.5
R 1364.6
R 1364.7

SO14_0
SO14_1
SO14_2
SO14_3
SO14_4
SO14_5
SO14_6
SO14_7

Tool group No. specification 2^0


Tool group No. specification 2^1
Tool group No. specification 2^2
Tool group No. specification 2^3
Tool group No. specification 2^4
Tool group No. specification 2^5
Tool group No. specification 2^6
Tool group No. specification 2^7

12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11
12.11

Clamp check (4th axis)


Unclamp check (4th axis)
Clamp check (5th axis)
Unclamp check (5th axis)

- 102 -

12.12
12.12
12.12
12.12

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address

Symbol

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Function

Note

R 1365.0
R 1365.1
R 1365.2
R 1365.3
R 1365.4
R 1365.5
R 1365.6
R 1365.7

SO15_0
SO15_1
SO15_2
SO15_3
SO15_4
SO15_5
SO15_6
SO15_7

Spindle override 2^0


Spindle override 2^1
Spindle override 2^2
Spindle override 2^3
Spindle override 2^4
Spindle override 2^5
Spindle override 2^6
Spindle override 2^7

12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32

R 1366.0
R 1366.1
R 1366.2
R 1366.3
R 1366.4
R 1366.5
R 1366.6
R 1366.7

SO16_0
SO16_1
SO16_2
SO16_3
SO16_4
SO16_5
SO16_6
SO16_7

Cutting override 2^0


Cutting override 2^1
Cutting override 2^2
Cutting override 2^3
Cutting override 2^4
Cutting override 2^5
Cutting override 2^6
Cutting override 2^7

12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32
12.32

R 1367.0
R 1367.1
R 1367.2
R 1367.3
R 1367.4
R 1367.5
R 1367.6
R 1367.7

SO17_0
SO17_1
SO17_2
SO17_3
SO17_4
SO17_5
SO17_6
SO17_7

Robot teach in progress


Interaction/independent operation switch
System start
Robot operation screen display
Cycle stop command
System stop command
Robot reset
Peripheral device ready

12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33
12.33

R 1368.0
R 1368.1
R 1368.2

SO18_0
SO18_1
SO18_2

R 1368.3

SO18_3

R 1368.4
R 1368.5

SO18_4
SO18_5

R 1368.6
R 1368.7

SO18_6
SO18_7

Automatic side door open


Automatic side door closed
Detection of the center through coolant lower
limit
Detection of an abnormal center through coolant
pressure (upper limit)
Detection of clogging of the center through filter
Detection of an abnormal center through coolant
pressure (lower limit)
Overheating of the center through coolant pump
Detection of clogging of the center through
suction filter

12.33
12.33
OFF when the lower limit is
detected.
OFF when an abnormal pressure is
detected.
OFF when clogging is detected.
OFF when an abnormal pressure is
detected.
ON when overheating is detected.
OFF when clogging is detected.

R 1369.0
R 1369.1
R 1369.2
R 1369.3
R 1369.4
R 1369.5
R 1369.6
R 1369.7

SO19_0
SO19_1
SO19_2
SO19_3
SO19_4
SO19_5
SO19_6
SO19_7

Center through coolant pump on/off command


Center through coolant on/off command
Air purge on/off command
Spindle air blow
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Start of the lubrication pump

12.17
12.17
12.17
Air of the spindle blows for ON.

- 103 -

Pump is executing for ON.

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Function

Address

Symbol

R 1370.0
R 1370.1
R 1370.2
R 1370.3
R 1370.4

SO20_0
SO20_1
SO20_2
SO20_3
SO20_4

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
System being started
(Reserved)
Automatic power-off disable signal

R 1370.5

SO20_5

Rapid traverse LOW selection

R 1370.6

SO20_6

Rapid traverse 100% selection

R 1370.7

SO20_7

R 1371.0
R 1371.1
R 1371.2
R 1371.3
R 1371.4
R 1371.5
R 1371.6
R 1371.7

SO21_0
SO21_1
SO21_2
SO21_3
SO21_4
SO21_5
SO21_6
SO21_7

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

R1372.0
R1372.1
R1372.2
R1372.3
R1372.4
R1372.5
R1372.6
R1372.7

SO22_0
SO22_1
SO22_2
SO22_3
SO22_4
SO22_5
SO22_6
SO22_7

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)

R1373.0
R1373.1
R1373.2
R1373.3
R1373.4
R1373.5
R1373.6
R1373.7

SO23_0
SO23_1
SO23_2
SO23_3
SO23_4
SO23_5
SO23_6
SO23_7

Customizing item 1 count signal


Customizing item 2 count signal
Customizing item 3 count signal
Customizing item 4 count signal
Customizing item 5 count signal
Customizing item 6 count signal
Customizing item 7 count signal
Customizing item 8 count signal

12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34
12.34

R 1374.0
R 1374.1
R 1374.2
R 1374.3
R 1374.4
R 1374.5
R 1374.6
R 1374.7

SO24_0
SO24_1
SO24_2
SO24_3
SO24_4
SO24_5
SO24_6
SO24_7

Optional block skip (/2)


Optional block skip (/3)
Optional block skip (/4)
Optional block skip (/5)
Optional block skip (/6)
Optional block skip (/7)
Optional block skip (/8)
Optional block skip (/9)

12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35
12.35

- 104 -

Note

12.33
ON when the automatic power-off
function is disabled.
ON when rapid traverse LOW is
selected. Turn on this signal for
approx. 100 ms.
ON when rapid traverse 100% is
selected. Turn on this signal for
approx. 100 ms.

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.1

BASIC SIGNALS
Address

Always ON
Always OFF
ON in a single scanning
cycle at the start of
operation
1.0-second clock pulse
0.1-second clock pulse
0.5-second clock pulse

12.2

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Symbol

Function

SI0_0 (R1300.0)
SI0_1 (R1300.1)
SI0_2 (R1300.2)

Always ON during ladder program operation.


Always OFF during ladder program operation.
ON only during a single scan cycle (4 ms) when the ladder
program starts.

SI0_3 (R1300.3)
SI0_4 (R1300.4)
SI0_5 (R1300.5)

Repeats on and off at intervals of about 1 second.


Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.1 seconds.
Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.5 seconds.

MACHINE STATUS
Address

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Symbol

Number of the program


being executed

SI2_0 (R1302.0)SI3_7 (R1303.7)

Tool number

SI4_0 (R1304.0)SI4_7 (R1304.7)

Cycle start in progress


Feed hold status

SI7_3 (R1307.3)
SI7_4 (R1307.4)

Alarm state
Reset in progress

SI7_5 (R1307.5)
SI7_6 (R1307.6)

Emergency stop state


Program stop state

SI7_7 (R1307.7)
SI8_6 (R1308.6)

Battery alarm state

SI9_2 (R1309.2)

Auto mode

SI10_6 (R1310.6)

Low air pressure

SI14_5 (R1314.5)

Emergency stop button

SI14_7 (R1314.7)

Feedrate override 100%

SI15_6 (R1315.6)

Spindle speed override


100%

SI15_7 (R1315.7)

Function

The main program number currently selected on the


ROBODRILL is output as binary data.
Example) When O1000 is selected:
Addresses:
R1303
R1302
Bits:
76543210 76543210
Data:
00000011 11101000
The number (magazine number) of the tool currently mounted
on the spindle is output as binary data.
Example) When T14 is mounted:
Address:
R1304
Bits:
76543210
Data:
00001110
ON during automatic operation (including MDI operation).
ON when the stop button lamp on the operator's panel is on
(in the status such as feed hold stop).
ON when an alarm is issued.
ON in the reset status (such as when the reset key on the
operator's panel is pressed, M30 or M02 is specified, or the
machine is in the emergency stop state).
OFF in the emergency stop state.
ON in the automatic operation stop state (when "STOP" is
displayed for the status display on the CNC screen).
ON when the voltage of the CNC memory battery is lower
than or equal to the specified value.
ON when the handle, jog, or manual reference position return
mode is not selected.
ON during memory or DNC operation when K06#7 is 1.
ON when the pressure of air supplied to the ROBODRILL is
lower than the specified value.
OFF when the emergency stop button on the operator's panel
is pressed (the hardware emergency stop circuit is turned
OFF).
ON when the cutting feedrate override switch is placed in the
100% position.
ON when the spindle speed override is 100%.

- 105 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS
[System ladder Custom ladder]
Symbol

Address
Operation enabled state

SI17_6 (R1317.6)

Tool clamp signal


Tool change signal
Turret recovery mode
Single block
Rapid traverse LOW
Rapid traverse 25%
Rapid traverse 50%
Rapid traverse 100%
Tap return mode

SI38_0 (R1338.0)
SI38_1 (R1338.1)
SI38_2 (R1338.2)
SI38_3 (R1338.3)
SI38_4 (R1338.4)
SI38_5 (R1338.5)
SI38_6 (R1338.6)
SI38_7 (R1338.7)
SI39_0 (R1339.0)

12.3

B-85314EN-1/01

Function

ON when all of the following conditions are satisfied:


<1> The front door is closed.
<2> Door interlock (SO4.6) is OFF.
<3> Feed hold is not in progress.
<4> The automatic mode is set.
<5> The machine is not in the alarm or emergency stop state.
<6> Reset is not in progress.
ON when the tool is clamped.
ON when the tool is changed.
ON when the turret is recovered.
ON when single block is set to ON.
ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to LOW.
ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 25%.
ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 50%.
ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 100%.
ON during tap return operation (ON while the tap return screen
of the maintenance setting screen is displayed).

FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL


Address

[System ladder Custom ladder]


Symbol

Function

Door open (M60)


Door open (M61)
Door open (M62)
Door open (M63)
Door open (M64)
Door open (M65)
Automatic door closed state

SI10_0 (R1310.0)
SI17_0 (R1317.0)
SI17_1 (R1317.1)
SI17_2 (R1317.2)
SI17_3 (R1317.3)
SI17_4 (R1317.4)
SI10_1 (R1310.1)

Automatic door open state

SI10_2 (R1310.2)

Automatic door open request


output
Automatic door close request
output

SI11_1 (R1311.1)

ON when the front automatic door is in the closed limit


position (the close limit proximity switch is ON and the
open limit proximity switch is OFF).
ON when the front automatic door is in the open limit
position (the open limit proximity switch is ON and the
close limit proximity switch is OFF).
ON when automatic door open is specified.

SI11_2 (R1311.2)

ON when automatic door close is specified.

Address

Specifying each M code causes the front automatic door


to open.
Each signal is turned ON when the door opens to the limit
position.

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Symbol

Door close request

SO3_0 (R1353.0)

External door open control

SO3_1 (R1353.1)

Function

When M60 to M65 is specified, turning this signal ON


causes the front automatic door to close and restarts
operation.
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the
relevant command.
Opens the front automatic door. The door is
automatically unlocked. (Door unlock control is not
needed.)
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the
relevant command.

- 106 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

Address
External door close control

Symbol

Function

SO3_2 (R1353.2)

Closes the front automatic door. Operation is not


restarted after the door is closed.
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the
relevant command.

[Front automatic door control using M60 to M65]


Opening and closing the automatic door with an M code
Specify M60 to
M65 command
Open automatic
door

Output "door open" signal

Is door close request


signal input?

Close automatic
door
Restart of
operation

In auto (MEM) or MDI mode, issuing a code M60 to M65 causes the automatic door to open.
When the door is open, inputting the appropriate signal to the machine causes the door to close and
operation to restart.
Door open signal: SI10_0, SI17_0 to SI17_4
Door close request signal: SO3_0

CAUTION
1 The door close request signal (from a custom ladder program to a system ladder
program) is effective only when an M60 to M65 command is being executed.
The signal is ignored if the machine is reset or if an M60 to M65 command is not
being executed.
2 When an M60 to M65 command is being executed, the operator message "2001
THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS OPEN." is not displayed even if the
door is open.
3 When the robot system standard package option is used, the M60 to M65
functions cannot be used.

- 107 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.4

B-85314EN-1/01

EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION

This function allows you to store several machining programs in program storage memory in advance, so
that you can call the desired program later by using a means such as a rotary switch.
Selecting the desired program number using a means such as a rotary switch first and then pressing the
cycle start button causes the specified program to be selected, starting automatic operation.
Program numbers O0001 to O0015 can be selected.
To use the external workpiece number search function, display the QUICK screen,
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT.
WORK No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Symbol

Address
Workpiece No.
search

Function

Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary


data.

SO0_0 (R1350.0)
SO0_3 (R1350.3)

[Relationship between the signal states and the program numbers to be selected]
Switch 4
Switch 3
Switch 2
Switch 1
Program number to be
(SO0_3)
(SO0_2)
(SO0_1)
(SO0_0)
selected
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

- 108 -

None selected
O0001
O0002
O0003
O0004
O0005
O0006
O0007
O0008
O0009
O0010
O0011
O0012
O0013
O0014
O0015

B-85314EN-1/01

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

CAUTION
1 This function is available only in automatic operation (MEM mode). It cannot be
used in MDI operation.
2 The effective program numbers are O0001 to O0015.
3 You do not necessarily store in memory the programs corresponding to all
numbers.
4 If the program corresponding to a selected number is not found in memory,
alarm message DS0059, "PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND" is issued when
the function is initiated.
5 When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single block
stop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selection is
executed; the current program restarts where it was stopped.
6 To restart a program at an intermediate point, perform a sequence number
search in automatic operation mode (MEM mode), then initiate the function.
Then, no program number selection is executed, but the program restarts where
it was stopped.
7 When the function is initiated with all the signals being turned OFF, no program
number selection is executed, but the currently selected program is executed.
To execute automatic operation with a program number other than O0001 to
O0015, use the steps below:
Perform a program number search (on the screen).
Turn all the program selection switch signals to "OFF".
Press the operation start button.
8 This function cannot be used together with the external program number search
function.
9 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the program
editing function of the CNC, alarm message DS0059 "PROGRAM NUMBER
NOT FOUND" is issued.

- 109 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.5

B-85314EN-1/01

EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION

This function allows you to supply a single program number from an external device such as a sequencer
to ROBODRILL, so that that program can be called from the memory in the ROBODRILL control unit.
Program numbers O0001 to O9999 can be selected.
The program number to be selected can be specified using a 4-digit BCD code.
To use the external program number search function, display the QUICK screen,
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT.
PROG. No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.

[Interface]
(Custom ladder System ladder)
Signal
Workpiece No.
search
Program number
data signal

Data read request


signal
External start
signal

Address

Function

SO0_0(R1350.0)
SO0_3(R1350.3)
SO0_0 (R1350.0)
SO0_1 (R1350.1)
SO0_2 (R1350.2)
SO0_3 (R1350.3)
SO0_4 (R1350.4)
SO0_5 (R1350.5)
SO0_6 (R1350.6)
SO0_7 (R1350.7)
SO1_0 (R1351.0)
SO1_1 (R1351.1)
SO1_2 (R1351.2)
SO1_3 (R1351.3)
SO1_4 (R1351.4)
SO1_5 (R1351.5)
SO1_6 (R1351.6)
SO1_7 (R1351.7)

Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary data.

SO2_0 (R1352.0)

When this signal is output, ROBODRILL reads the program


number specified with the program number data signal.
After the program number is selected (while an end-of-selection
signal is being output from the custom ladder program),
outputting this signal causes automatic operation to start. This
signal must be a pulse signal of 200 ms or longer.
(Automatic operation starts at the falling edge of the pulse signal.)

SO2_1 (R1352.1)

1 digit in
BCD

A program number is specified as a BCD code.


Those bits that are always 0 need not used.
You can omit them according to the program
numbers used.

10 digits in BCD

100 digits in BCD

1000 digits in BCD

- 110 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Signal
End-of-selection
signal

Address

Function

SI9_0 (R1309.0)

This signal indicates that program number data reading and


program number selection are completed and the machine is now
ready for an automatic operation start.
When this signal is output, turn the data read request signal OFF.
First confirm that this signal has been output, then start automatic
operation using the external start signal.
This signal is turned OFF in the following cases:
Operation start
Reset
Selection of a new program number

[Timing chart for an external program number search]


Program number data signal

Number setting

Data read request signal

ON

External start signal

ON

End of selection

ROBODRILL operation

ON

Number
reading

- 111 -

Selection

Automatic
operation

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

CAUTION
1 This function cannot be used together with the external workpiece number
search function.
2
When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single
block stop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selection
is executed; the current program restarts where it was stopped.
3
If there is no program corresponding to the selected number in memory, an
alarm (alarm message: DS0059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND) is issued
when an attempt is made to read the program number data.
4 If the data for the program number to be selected is 0, alarm message "DS1128
DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE " is issued. Before the data read request signal is
turned ON, be sure to set a number.
5 You can protect programs with program numbers O8000 to O8999 with the
appropriate NC parameter bit setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#0 (NE8))
Programs with program numbers O9000 to O9999 are protected with the
appropriate parameter setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#4 (NE9))
6 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the program
editing function of the CNC, alarm message DS1130 "SEARCH REQUEST NOT
ACCEPTED" is issued.
7 This function cannot be used during an emergency stop or reset.

- 112 -

B-85314EN-1/01

12.6

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION

This function outputs a specified M code number.


By performing the operation corresponding to the specified M code, an external device can be interlocked
with ROBODRILL.
An M code number is output as a 3-digit BCD code.
To use the external M code BCD output function, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/
SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "ON" for "M CODE
OUTPUT BY BCD".

- 113 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

[Interface]
Signal

M code number
data signal

Address

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Function

SI5_0 (R1305.0)
SI5_1 (R1305.1)
SI5_2 (R1305.2)
SI5_3 (R1305.3)
SI5_4 (R1305.4)
SI5_5 (R1305.5)
SI5_6 (R1305.6)
SI5_7 (R1305.7)
SI6_4 (R1306.4)
SI6_5 (R1306.5)
SI6_6 (R1306.6)
SI6_7 (R1306.7)

Data read request


signal

SI6_0 (R1306.0)

Distribution
completion signal

SI6_1 (R1306.1)

BCD output data


parity check signal

SI6_2 (R1306.2)

1 digit in BCD

A specified M code is output as a BCD code.


Not all data need not necessarily be read.
You can omit reading according to the M codes
used.

10 digits in BCD

100 digits in BCD


This signal indicates that the M code number data signal is being
output.
Read the M code number while this signal is being output.
This signal indicates that an auxiliary function (M, S, or T code) is
specified and the movement along each axis is completed. (This signal
is not usually used.)
The result of a parity check is output.
Parity check
Even parity
check
K01#1 = 0
Odd parity check
K01#1 = 1

Check
signal
0
1
0
1

Parity of specified M
code
K04#5 = 0 K04#5 = 1
Odd
Even
Even
Odd
Even
Odd

Odd
Even

K01#1: Selection between even and odd parity checks


K04#5: Selection between parity check result output states

Signal

Completion signal
(FIN)

Address

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Function

S02_5 (R1352.5)

After the operation of the external device is completed, input this


signal.
When the signal is input, ROBODRILL ends M code output, proceeding
to the next block of the program. Turn this signal OFF at the end of the
M code output.

- 114 -

B-85314EN-1/01

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

[Timing chart for external M code BCD output]


M code number data signal

ON

ON

Data read request signal

ON

ON

Completion signal

ROBODRILL operation

ON

M code specification

ON

M code specification

CAUTION
1 This function cannot be used together with the M code output function.
2 Never use the M codes used by FANUC.(From M00 to M199)
3 When using multiple M code commands, specify the external M code at the first
M code position.

- 115 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.7

B-85314EN-1/01

M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89)

This function outputs the signal corresponding to a specified M code.


[System ladder Custom ladder]
Address

Symbol

Function

M81 output
M82 output
M83 output

SI5_2 (R1305.2)
SI5_3 (R1305.3)
SI5_4 (R1305.4)

M84 output
M80 output
M85 output
M86 output
M87 output
M88 output
M89 output

SI5_5 (R1305.5)
SI5_1 (R1305.1)
SI5_6 (R1305.6)
SI5_7 (R1305.7)
SI6_0 (R1306.0)
SI6_1 (R1306.1)
SI6_2 (R1306.2)

A 100-ms pulse signal is output. (Pulse type)


ON when M83 is specified or OFF when M84 is specified. (ON1
type)
ON when the corresponding M code is specified. (FIN type)
OFF when the completion (FIN) signal (SO2_5) is turned ON.

(ON1 type)

(Pulse type)
M code
specification

Signal output

M code
specification

M81

Signal output

ON

M83

M84

ON

(FIN type)
M code
specification

Signal output

External device

M81

ON

Operation

Completion
signal

If an M code of the pulse or ON1 type is specified, the machine automatically proceeds to the next block
of the program after the output (or stoppage) of the signal.
If an M code of the FIN type is specified, the machine waits for the input of an external completion signal,
then proceeds to the next block of the program after the input of the signal.

CAUTION
Usually, M84 (SI5_5) is not output.
It is output if all M codes M80 to M89 are set to the FIN type.
(Display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE,
then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set FIN TYPE.)
In this case, M81 to M83 are also set to the FIN type.

- 116 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.8

INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION


(OPTION)

During the execution of a program, this signal can be turned ON to call another program. For details of
the interrupt type custom macro function, refer to the CNC operator's manual.

Address

Custom macro interrupt

12.9

SO3_4 (R1353.4)

Function

Starts an interrupt type custom macro.

RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION


Address

Reset & rewind

12.10

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Symbol

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Symbol

SO3_5 (R1353.5)

Function

When this signal is ON, the ROBODRILL performs the


following operations:
Decelerates and stops the machine along the controlled
axis along which it is moving.
Enters the reset state.
Cancels the alarms that can be released.
Rewinds the currently selected main program to its top
(not in the MDI mode).

ALARM OUTPUT 2

This signal is mainly used to control the buzzer when an alarm is issued.
[System ladder Custom ladder]
Address

Alarm output 2

Symbol

Function

SI17_5(R1317.5)

ON when an alarm is issued.


OFF when an alarm is released.
OFF when the alarm output 2 stop signal (SO9_2) is turned ON.
OFF when K06#2 is 1 and the time specified for timer T06 has
elapsed.

[Custom ladder System ladder]


Address

Alarm output 2
stop

Symbol

Function

SO9_2 (R1359.2)

When alarm output 2 (SI17_5) is ON, turning this signal ON turns


alarm output 2 (SI17_5) OFF.
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant
command.

- 117 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.11

B-85314EN-1/01

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

(1) Reset of a tool group (counter)


A specified tool group (counter) can be reset.
(Custom ladder System ladder)
Address

Signal

Tool group (counter)


number
Tool group (counter) reset
request

SO14_0 (R1364.0)

SO14_7 (R1364.7)
SO9_4 (R1359.4)

The number of the tool group (counter) to be reset is


specified as binary data. (0 to 14)
If 0 is specified, the currently selected tool group is assumed.
When this signal is output, ROBODRILL resets the tool group
(counter).
Turn this signal ON after specifying a tool group (counter)
number.
Keep it ON until the reset request reception signal (SI18_5) is
turned ON.
Turn it OFF as soon as the reset request reception signal is
turned ON.

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address

Signal

Tool group (counter) reset


request reception

SI18_5 (R1318.5)

Tool group (counter) reset


error

SI18_6 (R1318.6)

Function

Function

This signal indicates that ROBODRILL has accepted a tool


group (counter) reset request.
Turn the reset request signal (SO9.4) OFF after this signal is
turned ON.
This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal
(SO9_4) is turned OFF.
This signal indicates that an error occurred during an attempt
to reset a tool group (counter).
This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal
(SO9_4) is turned OFF.

SUPPLEMENT
To specify 0 as the tool group (counter) number (to specify the currently selected
tool group), specify tool group selection (M06 T1xx) after power-on, then issue a
reset request.
If a reset request is issued without specifying tool group selection, an error
(SI18_6 = ON) occurs.
Tool group number

Group number specification

Tool group reset request

ON

Tool group reset request reception

ON

Tool group reset error

ON

- 118 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

(2) Information about the life of each tool group (counter) and the currently selected tool group
(counter) number
Information about the life of each tool group (counter) can be indicated.
The group (counter) number of the tool currently used can be indicated.
Signal

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address

Currently selected tool


group (counter) number

SI32_0 (R1332.0)

SI32_7 (R1332.7)

Tool life end

SI33_0 (R1333.0)

SI34_7 (R1334.7)
SI50_0 (R1400.0)

SI63_7 (R1413.7)
SI35_0 (R1335.0)

SI36_7 (R1336.7)
SI64_0 (R1414.0)

SI77_7 (R1427.7)

Near tool life end

Function

The currently selected tool group (counter) number is indicated


as binary data.
0 is indicated if tool group selection (M06 T1**) has not been
specified since power-on.
Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in the
life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the life end
state.

Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in the


near life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the near
life end state.
1 can also indicate the life end state.

(3) Others
(System ladder Custom ladder)
Signal

Address

Function

Tool life end (tool


group)
Near tool life end

SI10_7 (R1310.7)

ON when at least one of the registered tool groups (counters) is


in the life end state.
ON when the use count (or time) for the currently used tool group
(counter) reaches the value set for advance notice of tool life
end.

SI11_6 (R1311.6)

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Signal

Tool breakage

Address

Function

SO7_0 (R1357.0)

When the tool life management function is used and this signal is
ON, the currently used tool is assumed to reach its tool life end. If
a spare tool is registered to the tool group, the new tool is used at
the next tool replacement. If no spare tool is registered, an alarm is
issued at the end of machining.
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant
command.

- 119 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.12

B-85314EN-1/01

ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL

(1) I/O signals for additional axis clamp control can be assigned with custom PMC.
Address

Function

Clamp check
(4th axis)
Unclamp check
(4th axis)
Clamp check
(5th axis)
Unclamp check
(5th axis)
Clamp request
(5th axis)
Unclamp request
(5th axis)
Clamped
(5th axis)

Signal

SO10_4
(R1360.4)
SO10_5
(R1360.5)
SO10_6
(R1360.6)
SO10_7
(R1360.7)
SI31_0
(R1331.0)
SI31_1
(R1331.1)
SI31_2
(R1331.2)

Clamp request
(4th axis)
Unclamp request
(4th axis)
Clamped
(4th axis)

SI31_3
(R1331.3)
SI31_4
(R1331.4)
SI31_5
(R1331.5)

Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the
system ladder program.
Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the
system ladder program.
Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the
system ladder program.
Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the
system ladder program.
Clamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)
Turned ON when the M68 command is issued.
Unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)
Turned ON when the M69 command is issued.
Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)
Turned ON when the M68 command is issued and OFF when the
M69 command is issued.
Clamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)
Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued.
Unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)
Turned ON when the M11 or M72 command is issued.
Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)
Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued and OFF when
the M11 or M72 command is issued.

(Sample ladder program)

X4.0

SO10_4

SI31_3

Y2.0

To use this function, set PMC parameter, keep relay K14#3 to 1.


(2) Specifying a command to clamp or unclamp an additional axis.
Signal

Address

4th-axis clamp (M10)


signal output command

SO8_0 (R1358.0)

4th-axis unclamp (M11)


signal output command

SO8_1 (R1358.1)

5th-axis clamp (M68)


signal output command

SO8_2 (R1358.2)

5th-axis unclamp (M69)


signal output command

SO8_3 (R1358.3)

Function

Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (4th


axis).
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.
Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis
(4th axis).
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.
Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (5th
axis).
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.
Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis
(5th axis).
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.

- 120 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.13

OPERATOR'S PANEL

(1) Disabling the operator's panel


This function disables the ROBODRILL operator's panel.
To use this function, set PMC parameter keep relay K16#0 to 1.
(Custom ladder System ladder)
Address

Signal description

Disabling of ROBODRILL
operator's panel

SO5_5 (R1355.5)

Function

Turning on this signal disables the ROBODRILL operator's


panel.

Turning on this signal causes the ROBODRILL to behave as follows:

Some buttons and keys on the ROBODRILL operator's panel become unusable.
<DOOR OPEN/CLOSE> key is also made unusable (optionally).
However, <EMERGENCY STOP> button, < FEED HOLD > button, <RESET> key, soft key and
MDI keys (ALPHABET, FIGURE AND ETC.) remain usable.
"OPERATION MODE" switches to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION (MEMORY) MODE."
If OPERATION MODE switching is impossible (for example, for "EMERGENCY STOPPING" or
"MODE SELECTION LOCKING"), however, switching to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE"
does not occur.
For "SPINDLE ROTATING" "IN COOLANT" "CUTTING AIR BLOW" and "CENTER
THROUGH COOLANT OUTPUT" each output is stopped (optionally)
"DRY RUN MODE" and "SINGLE BLOCK MODE" are canceled.
The M01 stop function is canceled (optionally).
The cutting override value is fixed at 100% regardless of the dial setting on the operator's panel.
The spindle override value is fixed at 100%.
The rapid traverse override value is fixed at 100%.
If this signal is issued when the machine is running, it becomes valid after the machine stops.
The diagnosis message "THE OPERATOR'S PANEL IS UNAVAILABLE." appears.
[PMC parameter, keep relay]
Function

Parameter

K16#0
K16#1

Operator's panel disable function


0 : Disables
1 : Enables
While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button
0 : Disables
1 : Enables
While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close button
0 : Disables
1 : Enables
While the operator's panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supply
0 : Canceled
1 : Not canceled
While the operator's panel is disabled, the skip key
0 : Disables
1 : Enables

K16#2
K16#3
K16#4

(2) Disabling the start button


Signal

Disabling of the machine


operator's panel start
button

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address

SO4_0 (R1354.0)

Function

When this signal is ON, the start button on the ROBODRILL


operator's panel is disabled. External start (SO2_1) is
available regardless of the status of this signal.
During turret recovery operation and menu operation, the
start button is available regardless of the status of this signal.

- 121 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

(3) Checking the lamps


Signal

Lamp check function ON

12.14

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address

SO5_7 (R1355.7)

Function

When this signal is ON, all LEDs and status indication lamps
(machine status output 1, 2, and 3) on the ROBODRILL
operator's panel are turned on.

OPERATION MODE SWITCHING


Signal

MEM mode selection


MDI mode selection
Handle mode selection
Jog mode selection
Reference mode selection
Edit mode selection

Signal

Switching of operation mode


(to the MEM mode)
Switching of operation mode
(to the MDI mode)
Switching of operation mode
(to the handle mode)
Switching of operation mode
(to the edit mode)

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address

SI8_0 (R1308.0)
SI8_1 (R1308.1)
SI8_2 (R1308.2)
SI8_3 (R1308.3)
SI8_4 (R1308.4)
SI8_5 (R1308.5)

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address

SO7_2 (R1357.2)

Function

ON while the corresponding mode is selected.


The status of MEM mode selection (SI8_0) is related as
follows:
When K14#2 is 0: Memory mode and remote mode
When K14#2 is 1: Only memory mode

Function

Switches to the corresponding operation mode.


Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.

SO7_3 (R1357.3)
SO7_4 (R1357.4)
SO7_5 (R1357.5)

- 122 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.15

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT
(System ladder Custom ladder)
Address

Function

Production
completion

Signal

SI8_7 (R1308.7)

Production
completion 1

SI11_4 (R1311.4)

Production
completion 2

SI11_5 (R1311.5)

ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 or 2 on the


counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or
equal to the scheduled number of products.
ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 on the
counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or
equal to the scheduled number of products.
ON when the number of products indicated by counter 2 on the
counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or
equal to the scheduled number of products.

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Signal

Counter 1
(production count)
reset
Counter 1 (total
production count)
reset
Counter 2
(production count)
reset
Counter 2 (total
production count)
reset
Counter screen
display

Address

S08_4 (R1358.4)

Function

Resets the corresponding counter.


Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.

S08_5 (R1358.5)

S08_6 (R1358.6)

S08_7 (R1358.7)

S09_0 (R1359.0)

Turning this signal ON displays the counter screen.


Turning this signal OFF displays the previous screen again.

- 123 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.16

B-85314EN-1/01

MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT

The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps and others are
output. Each machine status output signal can be turned ON according to a desired condition.

Signal

Machine status output


1, 2, 3 (END1, 2, 3
output)

Signal

Machine status output


1, 2, 3 request

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address
Function

SI7_0 (R1307.0)
SI7_2(R1307.2)

The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control
of status indication lamps and others are output. These signals
are set to the ON type even if blinking is selected as a screen
setting.
Select the status of each signal on MACHINE STATUS
OUTPUT displayed by selecting 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING,
then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from the QUICK screen.
[Signal status]
ALARM:
ON when an alarm is issued.
OPERATOR MESSAGE: ON when an operator message is
displayed.
PROGRAM EXECUTING: ON during the execution of a
program.
PROGRAM END:
ON after the end of program
operation (execution of M00, M01,
M02, or M30).
PRODUCT COMPLETED: ON at the completion of production
(production management function on
the QUICK screen).
FEED HOLD:
ON when the stop button lamp on the
operator's panel is ON.
NOTICE OF TOOL LIFE: ON when the remaining use count for
the last tool in the tool group is
smaller than or equal to the count for
advance notice.

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address
Function

SO5_2 (R1355.2)
SO5_4 (R1355.4)

The relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps


and others are turned ON. When a signal is ON, the
corresponding relay contact is ON.
Since the ON/OFF status of these relay contacts is also
controlled by the system ladder program, the relay contact may
remain ON even when the corresponding signal is OFF. To
control these relay contacts only by the custom ladder program,
set all MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT items to OFF. MACHINE
STATUS OUTPUT is displayed by selecting
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from
the QUICK screen.

- 124 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.17

COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT,


CENTER THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW
(System ladder Custom ladder)
Address

Signal

Machine interior cleaning


coolant output ON
Coolant output ON
Air blow ON
Center through coolant output
ON
Center through coolant pump
ON
Center through coolant ON
Air purge ON

SI9_4 (R1309.4)
SI11_0 (R1311.0)
SI11_3 (R1311.3)
SI11_7 (R1311.7)
SI24_3 (R1324.3)

ON when center through coolant pump ON is specified.

SI24_4 (R1324.4)
SI24_5 (R1324.5)

ON when center through coolant ON is specified.


ON when air purge ON is specified.

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address

Signal

Machine interior cleaning


coolant ON/OFF

SO7_7 (R1357.7)

Center through coolant pump


ON/OFF
Center through coolant
ON/OFF
Center through Air purge
ON/OFF

SO19_0 (R1369.0)

12.18

Function

ON when machine interior cleaning coolant pump ON is


specified.
ON when coolant ON is specified.
ON when air blow ON is specified.
ON when center through coolant ON is specified.

SO19_1 (R1369.1)
SO19_2 (R1369.2)

Function

Controls the machine interior cleaning coolant. Turning


this signal OFF stops the machine interior cleaning
coolant output.
Since the ON/OFF status of the machine interior cleaning
coolant is also controlled by the system ladder program,
the machine interior coolant may not be output by turning
this signal ON.
This signal is not effective when "MACHINE INTERIOR
CLEANING COOLANT" is set to OFF on the standard
selection screen displayed by selecting
6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING on the QUICK screen.
This signal is enabled when K14#4 is 1.
The corresponding device is turned ON or OFF.
Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the
relevant command. When the command is specified, the
status of each device is changed as follows:
When it is OFF: ON
When it is ON: OFF

COMPLETION OF MACHINING
(System ladder Custom ladder)

Signal

Address

End of program

SI9_3 (R1309.3)

Completion of
machining

SI15_5 (R1315.5)

Function

ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified. (M01 is valid only


when the temporary stop key on the operator's panel is ON.)
ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified.
OFF when the next operation starts, the reset key on the
operator's panel is pressed, the emergency stop button is
pressed, or the manual mode is selected.

- 125 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.19

B-85314EN-1/01

FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL


(System ladder Custom ladder)

Signal

Splash guard door


closed state

Address

Function

SI9_5 (R1309.5)

ON when the front door is locked.

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Signal

Door unlock

12.20

Address

Function

SO9_3 (R1359.3)

When the front door is locked, turning this signal ON unlocks the
door. When the front door is unlocked and is not open, turning
this signal ON locks the door. When the front door is open, this
signal is not effective. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when
specifying the relevant command.

AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL


(System ladder Custom ladder)

Signal

Address

Automatic side door


closed state
Automatic side door
open state

SI9_6 (R1309.6)

Function

SI9_7 (R1309.7)

ON when the automatic side door is in the closed limit position (the
proximity switch is ON).
ON when the automatic side door is in the open limit position (the
proximity switch is ON).

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Signal

Address

Automatic side door


open request
Automatic side door
close request
Door interlock

SO3_6 (R1353.6)
SO3_7 (R1353.7)
SO4_6 (R1354.6)

Function

While this signal is ON, the air valve for opening the automatic side
door is ON. (System side control is not exercised.)
While this signal is ON, the air valve for closing the automatic side
door is ON. (System side control is not exercised.)
Turning this signal ON stops program operation, spindle rotation,
coolant output, and other operations in the same way as when the
front door is opened.

- 126 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.21

AI TOOL MONITOR
(System ladder Custom ladder)

Signal

Address

Function

Warning level
detection

SI10_3 (R1310.3)

Breakage level
detection

SI10_4 (R1310.4)

12.22

ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle
during machining exceeds the warning level.
OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed.
OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1)
When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D12 is compared with
the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load
on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON
regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.
ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle
during machining exceeds the breakage level.
OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed.
OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1)
When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D14 is compared with
the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load
on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON
regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.

SPINDLE
(System ladder Custom ladder)

Signal

Address

Function

Spindle stop

SI10_5 (R1310.5)

S command

SI20_0 (R1320.0)
SI23_7 (R1323.7)

M03 command
M05 command
Spindle rotation
button ON

SI24_0 (R1324.0)
SI24_1 (R1324.1)
SI24_2 (R1324.2)

ON when the spindle stops (forward or reverse spindle rotation is


not specified).
The specified S code is output as binary data.
Example) When S8000 is specified
Addresses:
R1323
R1322
R1321
R1320
Bits:
76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210
Data:
00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000
ON when the M03 command is specified.
ON when the M05 command is specified.
On when the spindle rotation/stop button on the operator's panel is
pressed.

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Signal

No spindle rotating

Address

SO9_6 (R1359.6)

Function

Spindle rotation is disabled while this signal is ON.


When the spindle is rotating, turning this signal ON stops the
rotation of the spindle. When this signal is ON, specifying spindle
rotation causes an alarm.

- 127 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.23

SCREEN DISPLAY

Signal

Display in Japanese
Display in German
Display in French
Display in Italian
Display in Korean
Display in Spanish
Display in English
Display in Chinese
(Simplified)
Display in Portuguese
Display in Russian

12.24

B-85314EN-1/01

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address
Function

ON when the corresponding display language is set.

SI12_0 (R1312.0)
SI12_1 (R1312.1)
SI12_2 (R1312.2)
SI12_4 (R1312.4)
SI12_5 (R1312.5)
SI12_6 (R1312.6)
SI12_7 (R1312.7)
SI37_0 (R1337.0)
SI37_1 (R1337.1)
SI37_2 (R1337.2)

POSITION SWITCH

When the tool is positioned within the operation range specified for NC parameters along a servo axis, the
corresponding signal is turned ON.
(Example 1)
To turn position switch 1 ON within a range between 100.000 and 200.000 along the X-axis:
No. 6910 = 1, No. 6930 = 200.000, No. 6950 = 100.000

(Example 2)
To turn position switch 2 ON within a range between -100.000 and -200.000 along the Y-axis:
No. 6911 = 2, No. 6931 = -100.000, No. 6951 = -200.000
(System ladder Custom ladder)
Signal

Address

Position switch 1

SI13_0 (R1313.0)

Position switch 2

SI13_1 (R1313.1)

Position switch 3

SI13_2 (R1313.2)

Position switch 4

SI13_3 (R1313.3)

Position switch 5

SI13_4 (R1313.4)

Position switch 6

SI13_5 (R1313.5)

Position switch 7

SI13_6 (R1313.6)

Position switch 8

SI13_7 (R1313.7)

Function

Axis specification: No. 6910


Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6930
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6950
Axis specification: No. 6911
Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6931
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6951
Axis specification: No. 6912
Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6932
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6952
Axis specification: No. 6913
Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6933
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6953
Axis specification: No. 6914
Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6934
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6954
Axis specification: No. 6915
Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6935
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6955
Axis specification: No. 6916
Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6936
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6956
Axis specification: No. 6917
Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6937
Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6957

- 128 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.25

CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS

Signal

Movement along the Xaxis


Movement along the Yaxis
Movement along the Zaxis
Movement along the
4th axis
Movement along the
5th axis
Completion of X-axis
reference position
return
Completion of Y-axis
reference position
return
Completion of Z-axis
reference position
return
Completion of 4th-axis
reference position
return
Completion of 5h-axis
reference position
return
Establishment of Xaxis reference position
Establishment of Yaxis reference position
Establishment of Z-axis
reference position
Establishment of 4thaxis reference position
Establishment of 5thaxis reference position

Signal

X-axis interlock
Y-axis interlock
Z-axis interlock
4th-axis interlock
5th-axis interlock

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address
Function

SI14_0 (R1314.0)

ON when the tool is moving along the corresponding axis.


ON when the corresponding axis is selected in handle mode.

SI14_1 (R1314.1)
SI14_2 (R1314.2)
SI14_3 (R1314.3)
SI14_4 (R1314.4)
SI15_0 (R1315.0)

SI15_1 (R1315.1)

SI15_2 (R1315.2)

SI15_3 (R1315.3)

ON at the completion of one of the following operations:


Manual reference position return
Automatic reference position return (G28)
Reference position return check (G27)
OFF when the tool moves from the reference position along the
corresponding axis or the machine enters the emergency stop or
servo alarm state.
Not turned ON when the tool moves to the machine zero point
manually or according to the G00 or G01 command and when
the tool is positioned at the machine zero point along the
corresponding axis at the termination of tool replacement.

SI15_4 (R1315.4)

SI18_0 (R1318.0)
SI18_1 (R1318.1)
SI18_2 (R1318.2)

ON when the reference position is established along the


corresponding axis.
OFF when the reference position is lost.
OFF until the reference position is determined by the absolute
position detector at power-on.

SI18_3 (R1318.3)
SI18_4 (R1318.4)

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address
Function

SO4_1 (R1354.1)
SO4_2 (R1354.2)
SO4_3 (R1354.3)
SO4_4 (R1354.4)
SO4_5 (R1354.5)

Turning these signals OFF inhibits the movement along the


corresponding axes.
When a signal is turned OFF while the tool is moving, the tool
decelerates and stops along the corresponding axis. When the
signal is turned ON, the tool restarts moving.
These signals are effective when K14#5 is 1.

- 129 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.26

B-85314EN-1/01

CUSTOM MACROS
(System ladder Custom ladder)

Signal

Input signal for


custom macro
(#1100), (#1132)
(#1101), (#1132)
(#1102), (#1132)
(#1103), (#1132)
(#1104), (#1132)
(#1105), (#1132)
(#1106), (#1132)
(#1107), (#1132)
(#1108), (#1132)
(#1109), (#1132)
(#1110), (#1132)
(#1111), (#1132)
(#1112), (#1132)
(#1113), (#1132)
(#1114), (#1132)
(#1115), (#1132)
Input signals for
custom macro
(#1133)

Address

Function

SI25_0 (R1325.0)

ON when macro statement #11**=1 (**: 00 to 15) is executed. OFF


when #11**=0 is specified.
When #1132=nn (nn: 2-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is
output to SI25_0 to SI26_7 as binary data.

SI25_1 (R1325.1)
SI25_2 (R1325.2)
SI25_3 (R1325.3)
SI25_4 (R1325.4)
SI25_5 (R1325.5)
SI25_6 (R1325.6)
SI25_7 (R1325.7)
SI26_0 (R1326.0)
SI26_1 (R1326.1)
SI26_2 (R1326.2)
SI26_3 (R1326.3)
SI26_4 (R1326.4)
SI26_5 (R1326.5)
SI26_6 (R1326.6)
SI26_7 (R1326.7)
SI27_0 (R1327.0)
SI30_7 (R1330.7)

When #1133=nn (nn: 4-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is


output to SI27_0 to SI30_7 as binary data.

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Signal

Output signal for


custom macro
(#1000), (#1032)
(#1001), (#1032)
(#1002), (#1032)
(#1003), (#1032)
(#1004), (#1032)
(#1005), (#1032)
(#1006), (#1032)
(#1007), (#1032)
(#1008), (#1032)
(#1009), (#1032)
(#1010), (#1032)
(#1011), (#1032)
(#1012), (#1032)
(#1013), (#1032)
(#1014), (#1032)
(#1015), (#1032)

Address

Function

SO12_0 (R1362.0)

Turning each signal ON sets the corresponding system variable


#1000 to #1015 to 1.
When the signal is OFF, the corresponding system variable is set to
0.
Outputting binary data (2-byte data) to SO12_0 to SO13_7 sets the
data in #1032.
Cannot be used when a pallet changer of KAWATATEC or a tool
monitor of Nodeman is attached.

SO12_1 (R1362.1)
SO12_2 (R1362.2)
SO12_3 (R1362.3)
SO12_4 (R1362.4)
SO12_5 (R1362.5)
SO12_6 (R1362.6)
SO12_7 (R1362.7)
SO13_0 (R1363.0)
SO13_1 (R1363.1)
SO13_2 (R1363.2)
SO13_3 (R1363.3)
SO13_4 (R1363.4)
SO13_5 (R1363.5)
SO13_6 (R1363.6)
SO13_7 (R1363.7)

- 130 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.27

M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS

The number of the specified M code (first M code) is output as binary data.
Use these signals together with functional instruction No. 25: binary decode processing for M code
decode and other processing.
(CNC Custom ladder)
Signal

M code

12.28

Address

Function

F10.0 - F13.7

The number of the specified M code is output as binary data.


Example) When M200 is specified:
Addresses :
F13
F12
F11
F10
Bits:
76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210
Data:
00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000

OPERATION CONTROL
(Custom ladder System ladder)
Address

Function

External start

Signal

SO2_1 (R1352.1)

External hold

SO2_2 (R1352.2)

External reset

SO2_3 (R1352.3)

External
emergency stop

SO2_4 (R1352.4)

Single block mode


ON

SO2_6 (R1352.6)

Dry run mode ON

SO2_7 (R1352.7)

DNC operation

SO3_3 (R1353.3)

In the memory, remote, or MDI operation mode, turning this signal


ON, then OFF starts operation.
When the machine has a front automatic door and "OPEN DOOR
WITH START BUTTON" of automatic door control is set to ON,
operation starts after the front automatic door is closed. (only
during memory or remote operation)
Turn this signal ON for about 200 ms when specifying the relevant
command.
Turning this signal OFF during operation causes the tool to
decelerate and stop along each servo axis. When this signal is
OFF, memory operation, remote operation, MDI operation, and tool
replacement cannot be started.
Effective when K14#7 is 1.
Turning this signal ON causes the ROBODRILL to perform the
following operations:
Decelerates and stops the tool along the controlled axis along
which it is moving.
Enters the reset state.
Cancels the alarms that can be released.
Turning this signal OFF puts the ROBODRILL into the emergency
stop state. This signal provides emergency stop control at the
software level. Examine emergency stop control at the hardware
level as required.
Effective when K14#6 is 1.
Turning this signal ON puts the ROBODRILL into the single block
operation mode. Effective when K08#3 is 1. At this time, the single
operation button on the operator's panel is disabled.
Turning this signal ON puts the machine in the dry run operation
mode. Effective when K08#4 is 1. At this time, the dry operation
button on the operator's panel is disabled.
When the memory operation mode is selected, turning this signal
ON puts the machine in the remote operation mode.

- 131 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.29

B-85314EN-1/01

ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY


(Custom ladder System ladder)

Signal

Address

Function

Alarm message
display in progress

SO5_0 (R1355.0)

Operator message
display in progress

SO5_1 (R1355.1)

Operator message
display in progress
2

SO5_6 (R1355.6)

Turn this signal ON when an alarm message is displayed on the


custom PMC.
When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an
alarm message is displayed. The status indication lamps (machine
status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking is
selected for alarms)
Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the
custom PMC.
When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an
operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps
(machine status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking
is selected for operator messages)
This signal is not used when operator message display in progress
2 (SO5_6) is used.
Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the
custom PMC.
When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an
operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps
(machine status output 1, 2, 3) are not turned ON.
This signal is not used when operator message display in progress
(SO5_1) is used.

12.30

MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP


(Custom ladder System ladder)

Signal

Machine interior
lamp ON

12.31

Address

Function

SO7_6 (R1357.6)

Turning this signal ON turns the machine interior lamp on. Turning
this signal OFF turns the lamp off.
Effective when K08#0 is 1. At this time, the machine interior lamp
ON/OFF switch on the screen is disabled.

POWER-OFF
(Custom ladder System ladder)

Signal

Address

Function

Power OFF request

SO9_5 (R1359.5)

Turns the ROBODRILL control power OFF.


Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant
command.
When the command is specified during operation, the control power
is turned OFF after the tool stops moving along axes and the spindle
stops rotating.

- 132 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

12.32

OVERRIDE CONTROL

(1) Spindle override


(Custom ladder System ladder)
Signal

Spindle override
command

Address

Function

SO15_0 (R1365.0)
SO15_7 (R1365.7)

The spindle override is specified as binary data.


An override of 0% to 254% can be specified.
When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed.
When no data is set in R1365 by the custom ladder program at
power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically
set.
Effective when K14#1 is 1.
Example) To specify 100%
Address: R1365
Bits:
76543210
Data:
01100100

(2) Cutting feed override


(Custom ladder System ladder)
Signal

Address

Function

Cutting feed
override command

SO16_0 (R1366.0)
SO16_7 (R1366.7)

The cutting feed override is specified as binary data.


Specify the data [255 (override-to-be-specified)].
An override of 0% to 254% can be specified.
When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed.
When no data is set in R1366 by the custom ladder program at
power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically
set.
Effective when K14#1 is 1.
Example) To specify 100%, set 155.
Address: R1366
Bits:
76543210
Data:
10011011

- 133 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.33

B-85314EN-1/01

ROBOT INTERFACE

(1) When only the automatic side door is controlled

Signal

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address
Function

Automatic side door


closed state
Automatic side door
open state
System start

SI78_3 (R1428.3)

Teach mode
Front door open
Interaction mode

SI79_3 (R1429.3)
SI79_4 (R1429.4)
SI79_5 (R1429.5)

Signal

SI9_6 (R1309.6)
SI9_7 (R1309.7)

ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the closed limit
position (the proximity switch for the closed limit position is ON).
ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the open limit
position (the proximity switch for the open limit position is ON).
ON while the system start button is pressed (robot interface X17.4
= 1).
ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0).
ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0).
ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or
SO17_1 = 1).

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address
Function

Teach mode

SO17_0 (R1367.0)

Interaction/independe
nt operation switch

SO17_1 (R1367.1)

Automatic side door


open

SO18_0 (R1368.0)

Automatic side door


closed

SO18_1 (R1368.1)

System being started


lamp

SO20_2 (R1370.2)

When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that


robot teach operation is in progress (valid when K19#0 = 1).
When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL is placed in the
interaction mode. (When using this signal, do not use the X17.2
signal of the robot interface.)
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety
gate) is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal
is ON for about 100 ms.
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety
gate) is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is
ON for about 100 ms.
When this signal is set to ON, the "system being started" lamp is
turned on. (Robot interface Y7.1 is set to ON.)

(2) When the automatic side door and robot system are controlled

Signal

(System ladder Custom ladder)


Address
Function

Robot system being


started
Cycle stop mode

SI78_0 (R1428.0)

ON when system operation is being started.

SI78_1 (R1428.1)

System stop mode

SI78_2 (R1428.2)

Teach mode
Front door open
Interaction mode

SI79_3 (R1429.3)
SI79_4 (R1429.4)
SI79_5 (R1429.5)

ON when the cycle stop mode is set with the soft key [CYCLE
STOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the cycle
stop command output from the custom PMC.
OFF when the cycle stop mode is terminated or canceled.
ON when the system stop mode is set with the soft key [SYSTEM
STOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the system
stop command output from the custom PMC.
OFF when the system stop mode is terminated or canceled.
ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0).
ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0).
ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or
SO17_1 = 1).

- 134 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

B-85314EN-1/01

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Address

Function

Teach mode

Signal

SO17_0 (R1367.0)

Interaction/independ
ent operation switch

SO17_1 (R1367.1)

Robot system start

SO17_2 (R1367.2)

Robot operation
screen display

SO17_3 (R1367.3)

This signal is used when an address other then the robot teach inprogress signal (X225.7) of the robot system is to be used or when a
condition is to be added.
When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that robot
teach operation is in progress. (This signal is valid when K19#0 =
1.)
This signal provides the same function as the
interaction/independent input (X17.2) of the robot interface. When
this signal is set to ON, the robot system is placed in the interaction
mode.
(When using this signal, do not use X17.2.)
This signal provides the same function as the system start input
(X17.4) of the robot interface. When this signal is set to ON, system
operation is started. When using this signal, ensure that this signal
is ON for about 100 ms.
(This signal is valid when K25#3 = 1.)
When this signal is set to ON, the robot operation screen is
displayed.
When this signal is set to OFF, the screen display returns to the
previous screen.

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Signal

Address

Function

Robot system cycle


stop command

SO17_4 (R1367.4)

Robot system stop


command

SO17_5 (R1367.5)

Robot reset

SO17_6 (R1367.6)

Peripheral device
ready

SO17_7 (R1367.7)

Automatic side door


open

SO18_0 (R1368.0)

Automatic side door


closed

SO18_1 (R1368.1)

This signal provides the same function as the soft key [CYCLE
STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON,
the cycle stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during the
cycle stop mode, the cycle stop mode is canceled. When using this
signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.
(This signal is valid when K25#0 = 1. When this signal is valid, the
[CYCLE STOP] key cannot be used.)
This signal provides the same function as the soft key [SYSTEM
STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON,
the system stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during
the system stop mode, the system stop mode is canceled. When
using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.
(This signal is valid when K25#1 = 1. When this signal is valid, the
[SYSTEM STOP] key cannot be used.)
This signal provides the same function as the soft key [ROBOT
RESET] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to
ON, the reset signal is output to the robot. When using this signal,
ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.
(This signal is valid when K25#2 = 1. When this signal is valid, the
[ROBOT RESET] key cannot be used.)
This signal posts the ready state of the peripheral device in the robot
system. Ensure that this signal is set to ON when the peripheral
device is ready. When this signal is OFF, system operation cannot
be started.
(This signal is valid when K21#4 = 1.)
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate)
is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for
about 100 ms.
When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate)
is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for
about 100 ms.

- 135 -

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM


AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

12.34

B-85314EN-1/01

Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item

At the Periodical Maintenance Screen, cumulative value of customize item can be counted with the
desired condition by using following custom signal.
(Custom ladder System ladder)
Signal

Address

Function

Customizing item 1
count signal
Customizing item 2
count signal
Customizing item 3
count signal
Customizing item 4
count signal
Customizing item 5
count signal
Customizing item 6
count signal
Customizing item 7
count signal
Customizing item 8
count signal

SO23_0 (R1373.0)

When CUSTOM (TIME) is selected as Count type, count the time


during the corresponding custom signal is ON.
When CUSTOM (COUNT) is selected as Count type, count the
number of the corresponding custom signal is changed from OFF to
ON.

12.35

SO23_1 (R1373.1)
SO23_2 (R1373.2)
SO23_3 (R1373.3)
SO23_4 (R1373.4)

When using CUSTOM (COUNT) as Count type, corresponding


signal is turned on more than 500 msec by custom ladder. If that
time is short, counting number may be skipped.

SO23_5 (R1373.5)
SO23_6 (R1373.6)
SO23_7 (R1373.7)

BLOCK SKIP

Effective when K08#1 is 1. At this time, the block skip buttons on the screen (standard operator's panel)
and operator's panel (operator's panel with the full keyboard) are disabled.
(Custom ladder System ladder)
Signal

Block skip ON
( /, /1 )
Block skip ON
( /2 )
Block skip ON
( /3 )
Block skip ON
( /4 )
Block skip ON
( /5 )
Block skip ON
( /6 )
Block skip ON
( /7 )
Block skip ON
( /8 )
Block skip ON
( /9 )

Address

Function

SO7_1 (R1357.1)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip (/, /1) function.

SO24_0 (R1374.0)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /2 ) function.

SO24_1 (R1374.1)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /3 ) function.

SO24_2 (R1374.2)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /4 ) function.

SO24_3 (R1374.3)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /5 ) function.

SO24_4 (R1374.4)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /6 ) function.

SO24_5 (R1374.5)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /7 ) function.

SO24_6 (R1374.6)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /8 ) function.

SO24_7 (R1374.7)

Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /9 ) function.

- 136 -

13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

13

USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL


INSTRUCTIONS

(Variable timer) Functional instruction No.: 3

Do not write any instructions


in this area.
Timer No.

Timer relay

Timer start
condition

After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON.
The effective timer Nos. are 121 to 200.
For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address.
Set the desired timer value on the PMC parameter - Timer screen.
The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.

(Fixed timer) Functional instruction No.: 24

Timer No.

Do not write any instructions


in this area.

Time that the


timer is set for
Timer relay

Timer start
condition

After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON.
The effective timer Nos. are 1 to 140.
For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address.
The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.

- 137 -

13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

(Rising edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 57

Do not write any instructions


in this area.

Start condition

Register No.

Output

If the start condition turns ON, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle.
The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once.
The valid register No. range is the same as that for the falling edge detection function (SUB58).

(Falling edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 58

??

Do not write any instructions


in this area.

Start condition

Register No.

Output

If the start condition turns OFF, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle.
The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once.
The valid register No. range is the same as that for the rising edge detection function (SUB57).

- 138 -

13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

(Counter) Functional instruction No.: 5

Do not write any instructions


in this area.

Counter No.

Control condition
CN0
UPDOWN
RST
ACT

Countup output

Control
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Function
Starts the counter with 0.
Starts the counter with 1.
Up counter
Down counter
Cancels a reset.
Resets a counter.
Deactivates a timer.
Activates a timer.

The output turns ON when the setting becomes equal to the count.
The effective counter Nos. are 40 to 69.
To control RST and ACT, use a pulse signal. RST and ACT function at the rising edge of a pulse
signal.
For the counter output, you can specify any desired address.
Enter the desired setting on the PMC parameter - Counter screen.
The effective counter settings are 0 to 32767.

- 139 -

13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

(Jump) Functional instruction No.: 10


(Jump end)
Functional instruction No.: 30

Do not write any instructions in this area.

Start condition

Number of coils to jump over

Do not write any instructions in these areas.

If the start condition turns ON, control jumps over the specified number of coils without executing
them at all.
If specifying the number of coils, do not use JMPE (SUB30).
If the number of coils is set to 0, control jumps over the JMP (SUB10) to JMPE (SUB30) section.
Control jumps over any functional instructions.

(Common line control)


Functional instruction No.: 9
(Common line control end) Functional instruction No.: 29

Do not write any instructions in this area.

Start condition

No. of coils to be turned off

Do not write any instructions in these areas.

If the start condition turns OFF, the specified number of coils are turned OFF.
If specifying the number of coils, do not use COME (SUB29).
If the number of coils is set to 0, the COM (SUB9) to COME (SUB29) section are turned OFF.
Any functional instructions will be executed even if the start condition with the COM instruction is
OFF, but the output of the execution results will be turned OFF.
In a range specified with a COM, you cannot specify another COM.
The output of WRT.NOT (inverted output of logic operation result) will be "1" if the start condition
with the COM instruction is OFF.

- 140 -

13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

B-85314EN-1/01

(Binary decoding) Functional instruction No.: 25

A
B
C
Start
condition
D

The following explanation is limited to those cases in which specified M codes are to be decoded.
Parameter
A

Format specification

B
C

Code data address


Decoding instruction No.

Decoding result output


address

Function
Set a format in the format of 0nn4, where nn specifies that 8 x nn M codes are
to be decoded.
nn may be 0 to 99.
If 0 is specified, eight M codes will be decoded.
Examples:
To decode M200 to M205, set 0014(14).
To decode M200 to M207, set 0014(14).
To decode M200 to M209, set 0024(24).
To decode M200 to M219, set 0034(34).
Set F10.
Specify the number of the first M code to be decoded.
Example:
To decode M codes starting with M200, set 200.
Specify an unused internal relay (R address).
If the nn in the format specification is 0 or 1, 1 bytes is required; otherwise,
consecutive nn bytes are required.

In the above examples:


If M200 is specified, R2100.0 is ON.
If M201 is specified, R2100.1 is ON.
If M202 is specified, R2100.2 is ON.
:
If M207 is specified, R2100.7 is ON.

- 141 -

13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS


(Conditional subprogram call)
(Unconditional subprogram call)

B-85314EN-1/01

Functional instruction No.: 65


Functional instruction No.: 66

Subprogram number called


Call condition

If the conditional subprogram call instruction CALL (SUB65) is specified, the specified subprogram
is called only when the call condition is ON.
If the unconditional subprogram call instruction CALLU (SUB66) is specified, the specified
subprogram is called unconditionally.

- 142 -

14.SETTING PARAMETERS

B-85314EN-1/01

14

SETTING PARAMETERS

Parameter
K03#6
K08#0

Function

K14#2

Center through coolant pump control


ON/OFF control of the lamp inside the
machine
Block skip ON/OFF control
Single-block ON/OFF control
Dry run ON/OFF control
Custom PMC editing
Spindle/cutting override control by custom
PMC
Signal "ON" condition of S18.0

K14#3

Additional axis clamp control signal

K14#4
K14#5
K14#6
K14#7
K15#7
K16#0
K16#1

Machine interior cleaning coolant control


Interlock control for each axis
Emergency stop control
Feed hold control
Custom PMC function
Operator's panel disable function
While the operator's panel is in the disabled
state, the M01 stop button
While the operator's panel is in the disabled
state, the door open/close button
While the operator's panel is disabled,
spindle rotation and coolant supply
While the operator's panel is disabled, the
skip key
Teaching signal control
Cycle stop control
System stop control
Robot reset control
System startup control

K08#1
K08#3
K08#4
K14#0
K14#1

K16#2
K16#3
K16#4
K19#0
K25#0
K25#1
K25#2
K25#3

K
#*

: PMC parameter, keep relay


: *-th bit

- 143 -

0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled

1: Controlled
1: Controlled

0:
0:
0:
0:
0:

1:
1:
1:
1:
1:

Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled
Enabled
Not controlled

0: Memory mode and


remote mode
0: Standard address

Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Disabled
Controlled

1: Memory mode only

0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0: Not controlled
0 : Disables

1: Allocated with custom


PMC
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1: Controlled
1 : Enables

0 : Disables

1 : Enables

0 : Canceled

1 : Not canceled

0 * Disables

1 : Enables

0:
0:
0:
0:
0:

1:
1:
1:
1:
1:

Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled
Not controlled

Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

15
15.1

B-85314EN-1/01

ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
Screen

The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be displayed on the PMC alarm screen.
Alarm number
ER01 PROGRAM DATA
ERROR

ER02 PROGRAM SIZE


OVER

ER03 PROGRAM SIZE


ERROR(OPTION)

ER04 PMC TYPE


UNMATCH

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

<1> Enter the sequence program again.


<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the sequence program again, the
error may be due to a hardware fault. In
that case, contact us.
<1> Reduce the size of the sequence
program.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
<1> Reduce the size of the sequence
program.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
Change the sequence program so that it
specifies the adequate PMC type, by using the
programmer.

The sequence program is invalid.

ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH

Contact us.

ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK


ERROR. PLEASE TURN ON
POWER AGAIN WITH
PRESSING 'O'&'Z'. (CLEAR
PMC SRAM)
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY

<1> Turn on the power of the CNC again, by


holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at the
same time.
<2> Replace the backup batteries.

ER18 PROGRAM DATA


ERROR BY I/O
ER19 LADDER DATA
ERROR

<1> Enter the sequence program again.


<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the sequence program again, the
error may be due to a hardware fault. In
that case, contact us.
Enter the sequence program again.
Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen again, and terminate the editing
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key.

ER22 NO PROGRAM
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM
IS OUT OF RANGE

Enter the sequence program again.


Correct the sequence program; change the
parameter number specified in a functional
instruction to a value that is within the
allowable range.

ER33 I/O Link ERROR(CHn)


(Note3)

Contact us; replace the faulty hardware.

- 144 -

The sequence program is too


large to load into the save area.
The sequence program is invalid.

The sequence program exceeds


the size specified by the ladder
step count option.

The PMC type specified in the


sequence program does not
match the type of the PMC
actually in use.
An unsupported function is used
in the sequence program.
The nonvolatile memory of the
PMC system needs to be
initialized in such cases as when
you have changed the PMC
model.
The parity of the sequence
program is invalid.

Reading sequence program was


interrupted.
During editing the ladder, the
screen display is switched to a
CNC screen by the operation of a
function key.
The sequence program is empty.
An out-of-range parameter
number is specified in the TMR,
TMRB, TMRBF, CTR, CTRB,
DIFU, or DIFD functional
instruction.
The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.

B-85314EN-1/01

Alarm number
ER34 ER34 I/O Link ERROR
(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)

ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT


DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Faulty location/corrective action
<1> Check the cable connections to the
devices of group xx.
<2> Check whether the power of each I/O
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Replace any device of group xx in which
the PMC control module is embedded.
Reduce the output data count of group xx.

ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT


DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)

Reduce the input data count of group xx.

ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN


BASE(CHn)
(Note3)

Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or


less.

ER38 MAX SETTING


OUTPUT DATA OVER(CHn
Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)

<1> In case of I/O Link, reduce the total


amount of output data of all groups to 128
bytes or less.
<2> In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total
amount of output data of all groups to 256
bytes or less.

ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT


DATA OVER(CHn xx)
(Note1)(Note3)

<1> In case of I/O Link, reduce the total


amount of input data of all groups to 128
bytes or less.
<2> In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total
amount of input data of all groups to 256
bytes or less.

ER43 PROGRAM DATA


ERROR(PT/NT)

<1> Store sequence program which is


compiled again after recompilations using
FANUC LADDER-III.
<2> If you see the same alarm again after
<1>, contact us.
Add a required function block option.

ER45 NO OPTION
(FUNCTION BLOCK)

- 145 -

Contents
An I/O device communication
error occurred on the slave side
of group xx.

The output data count of I/O Link


group xx exceeds the upper limit
(33 bytes).
Or the output data count of I/O
Link i group xx exceeds the
upper limit (65 bytes for the
normal I/O, 29 bytes for the
safety I/O).
The superfluous data is regarded
as invalid.
The input data count of I/O Link
group xx exceeds the upper limit
(33 bytes).
Or the input data count of I/O
Link i group xx exceeds the
upper limit (65 bytes for the
normal I/O, 29 bytes for the
safety I/O). The superfluous data
is regarded as invalid.
The slot number for the I/O Link
exceed the upper limit (10). The
slot number larger than 11 is
regarded as invalid.
The I/O area for the I/O Link is
insufficient.
(The area allocated to the group
xx and later on the output side
is regarded as invalid.)
In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area
is insufficient in the normal
update cycle mode.
The I/O area for the I/O Link is
insufficient.
(The area allocated to the group
xx and later on the input side is
regarded as invalid.)
In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area
is insufficient in the normal
update cycle mode.
The sequence program is invalid.

No function block option is


specified.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Alarm number

B-85314EN-1/01

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

ER46 MESSAGE DATA


UPDATE ERROR.
PLEASE TRUN OFF
POWER AFTER SAVING
DATA.

Save the corrected sequence program or


message data for multi-language display to FROM. Moreover, turn the power off/on.

ER47 ILLEGAL OVERRIDE


FUNCTION SETTING (TOO
MANY PMC PATHS)

The override mode of the force I/O function is


available in 3 or less PMC paths in same time.
In some PMC paths, make the function invalid.
Moreover, turn the power off/on.
Remove the setting of exceeding setting time
on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR
SETTING screen.

The message data in the


sequence program or the
message data for multi-language
display cannot be updated. It is
necessary to turn off/on the
power. The ladder program
cannot be executed when this
alarm occurs.
The override function is enabled
in four or more PMC paths.

ER48 STEP SEQUENCE


TIME OVER(xxH)

ER50 PMC EXECUTION


ORDER ERROR
ER51 PMC EXECUTION
PERCENTAGE ERROR

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to 11904.

ER52 I/O Link CHANNEL


ASSIGNMENT ERROR
(Note3)
ER54 NC-PMC I/F
ASSIGNMENT ERROR
ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION
CYCLE ERROR
ER57 MULTI-PATH PMC I/F
ASSIGNMENT ERROR
ER58 PMC MEMORY TYPE
SETTING ERROR
ER60 I/O Link i
ERROR(CHn)
(Note3)
ER61 I/O Link i ERROR(CHn
Gxx)
(Note1) (Note3)

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11910 to 11912.

ER62 I/O Link i DCS ERROR


(Note3)
ER63 I/O Link CHANNEL
SETTING ERROR
(Note3)

ER64 I/O Link i TOO MANY


CONNECTED
GROUPS(CHn)
(Note3)

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to 11909.

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11920 to 11929.


Check CNC parameter No. 11930.
Check CNC parameter No. 11932.
Check CNC parameter No.11940 to No.11944.
Contact us. Exchange of the hardware.

<1> Check the cable connected to the device


of group xx.
<2> Check the power supply of the I/O device
if the power is turned on earlier than the
power of CNC.
<3> Exchange the I/O device in group xx in
which PMC control module is built.
Contact us. Exchange of the hardware.
<1> Change the channel configuration in order
to reduce the I/O points. As for the
communication method for each channel,
specify the CNC parameter No. 11933#0
and 1.

Reduce the number of connected I/O devices


to 24 or less.

- 146 -

The activated condition of step


sequence exceeds the time limit,
which is set on the STEP
SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR
SETTING screen.
The execution order setting of the
multi-PMC function is invalid.
The execution percentage setting
of the multi-PMC function is
invalid.
The I/O Link channel assignment
to the PMC system is invalid.
The interface assignment
between NC and PMC is invalid.
The ladder level 1 execution
cycle setting is invalid.
The assignment of multi-path
PMC interface is invalid.
The setting of PMC Memory
Type is invalid.
The LSI for I/O Link i is faulty.

The connection error occurred in


the slave of group xx.

The LSI for I/O Link i DCS is


faulty.
Total I/O points are over
4096/4096 points in system.
For the I/O Link, the I/O points
are 1024/1024 points for one
channel. For the I/O Link i,
2048/2048 points for one
channel.
25 or more of I/O devices are
connected in channel n.

B-85314EN-1/01

Alarm number

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

ER65 I/O Link i TOO MANY


SLOTS(CHn)
(Note3)
ER66 I/O Link i PMC
ADDRESS OVERLAPPED
(PMCm X(Y)nnnn)
(Note3)

Reduce the number of connected I/O modules


to 256 or less.

257 or more of I/O modules are


connected in channel n.

Enter the PMC address or size again so that


any address is not used by multiple PMCs that
share PMC memory.

ER67 I/O Link i TOO MANY


SAFETY I/O GROYPS
(Note3)

Reduce the group number of safety I/O.

ER68 I/O Link i TOO MANY


ASSIGNMENTS IN HIGH
SPEED MODE (CHn,Gyy)
(Note1) (Note3)

When there are some groups which is set to


high-speed update cycle mode in I/O Link i,
Correct the transmission timing. Refer to
subsection 3.4.6.

ER69 I/O Link i


ASSIGNMENT ADDRESS
INVALID(CHn Gyy)
(Note2)(Note3)
ER70 PMC ADDRESS
BLOCK OVERLAPPED
BETWEEN I/O Link AND I/O
Link i(PMCm X(Y)nnnn)
(Note3)

Correct the assignment data of I/O Link i.

The address X(Y)nnnn


assigned in PMC path m is
assigned to another PMC path
that is shared the common
memory with PMC path m.
The total group number of safety
I/O in PMC paths exceed 4 or the
total group number of safety I/O
in DSCPMC exceed 4 for I /O
Link i.
In the channel n, the
transmission size exceeds the
limit of high-speed mode for I/O
Link i. The assignment of group
yy or later cannot be performed.
The address of false PMC path is
assigned in group yy of channel
n of I/O Link i assignment data.

ER71 I/O Link i STATUS


ALARM LENGTH OVER IN
GROUP(CHn Gxx)
(Note1)(Note3)
ER89 EDITING I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA IS
NOT COMPLETED
ER90 TOO LARGE I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA
(Note3)
ER91 I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA PARITY
(Note3)
ER92 I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA ERROR BY I/O
ER93 UNSUPPORTED I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA
(Note3)
ER94 I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA ERROR
(Note3)

<1> Delete the assignment data for I/O Link i


or correct the assignment address.
<2> Correct the X/Y address block of the I/O
Link channel. (The setting of Machine
signal interface of PMC configuration
parameter)
<3> Check the communication method of I/O
Link. (NC parameter 11933#0,#1)
<4> Check the setting of the selectable
assignment data function for I/O Link i.
Correct the configuration of I/O devices and
reduce the total of the status alarms to
64bytes or less.
Finish the edit of I/O configuration data.

Reduce the I/O configuration data file.

<1> Input I/O configuration data file again.


<2> When re-input cannot solve this error, the
hardware may be failure. Contact us.
Input I/O configuration data file again.

There is a PMC address block


which is assigned in both I/O Link
and I/O Link i.

The total of the status alarms for


I/O devices connected with group
xx of channel n exceeds 64
bytes
I/O configuration data is invalid
because that the editing of the
I/O configuration data is in the
midst.
I/O configuration data is larger
than the save area or invalid.
The parity of I/O configuration
data is invalid.

Correct the type of I/O configuration data and


input again.

Reading of I/O configuration file


is interrupted.
The type of I/O configuration data
is invalid.

Re-compile the I/O configuration data by FLIII. Moreover, input again.

Data configuration of I/O


configuration data is abnormal.

- 147 -

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Alarm number
ER95 I/O DEVICE
MISMATCH(CHn)
(Note3)

ER96 I/O Link MAX GROUP


OVER(CHn)
(Note3)

ER97 I/O Link FAILURE(CHn


Gxx)
(Note1) (Note3)

WN02 OPERATE PANEL


ADDRESS
ERROR

Faulty location/corrective action


When this alarm occurs on a well-worked
machine, the causes may be following:
<1> Disconnection of communication cable or
contact fault.
<2> The power of an I/O device is turned off.
Or the power on is delayed.
<3> The failure of an I/O device.
<4> The power of some I/O devices remain
when the power of CNC is turned off/on.
Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on
when the power of CNC is turned off/on.
When this alarm occurs during a debugging of
sequence program, the following causes also
come up.
<5> The configuration (type, order or number)
of the I/O devices is wrong.
<6> Invalid I/O configuration data is registered.
You can confirm the error I/O device in the I/O
Device Monitor screen.
<1> Check the PMC paths and addresses of
first and second blocks of n channel on
configuration parameter setting screen.
<2> Check the total groups of first and second
block on I/O module assignment.
<3> Check the parameter setting of
"Selectable I/O Link assignment
function".
When this alarm occurs on a well-worked
machine, the cause may be following.
<1> The failure of the cable or contact from
group (xx 1) to xx.
<2> The power of an I/O device of group xx
or later is turned off. Or the power on is
delayed.
<3> The failure of an I/O device of group xx
or (xx 1).
<4> The power of some I/O devices remain
when the power of CNC is turned off/on.
Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on
when the power of CNC is turned off/on.
If this alarm occurs during a debugging of
sequence program, the following causes also
come up.
<5> The group number of I/O device is invalid.
<6> The mistake of the assignment setting of
I/O modules.
<7> The mistake of the parameter setting of
"Selectable I/O Link assignment function"
<8> The mistake of the machine signal
interface setting.
You can confirm the details of the error in the
I/O Device Monitor screen.
Correct the Series 0 operator's panel address
that is set in the PMC system parameter.

- 148 -

B-85314EN-1/01

Contents
This alarm occurs when actual
I/O devices connected to CNC
differ from the I/O configuration
data registered in the I/O Device
Monitor screen. The ladder
program runs regardless of the
occurrence of this alarm.

When dual assignment of I/O


Link channel is used, total groups
of first and second block exceeds
16 groups.
The ladder program runs
regardless of the occurrence of
this alarm.
This alarm occurs when less I/O
devices are connected.
This alarm occurs when a total
group count of the I/O module
assignment are different with one
of connected device count.
The ladder program runs
regardless of the occurrence of
this alarm.

The Series 0 operator's panel


address that is set in the PMC
system parameter is invalid.

B-85314EN-1/01

Alarm number

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Faulty location/corrective action

WN03 ABORT NCWINDOW/EXIN

Modify the ladder program and turn on the


power of the CNC again. Refer to subsection
4.15 for details.

WN07 LADDER SP
ERROR(STACK)

Correct the sequence program so that the


subprogram has eight or fewer levels of
nesting.

WN09 SEQUENCE
PROGRAM IS NOT
WRITTEN TO FLASH ROM

If you want to use the current sequence


program next time you power on the system,
write the sequence program to flash ROM. If
you have made any unwanted change to the
sequence program by mistake, read the
original sequence program from flash ROM.

WN10 NO OPTION(STEP
SEQUENCE)

<1> Add the step sequence option.


<2> Arrange so that the step sequence
subprogram will not be called.

WN11 INCOMPATIBLE
FUNCTION

WN58 UNSUPPORTED
FUNCTION

Compile the sequence program again with


FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder Editing
Package.
The Override function is for debugging only.
So, please disable the function when shipping
the machine.
Correct the sequence program with Ladder
editing function on PMC screen.

WN59 MESSAGE FILE


SYMBOL UNDEFINED

Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.

WN60 MESSAGE FILE


SYMBOL INVALID

Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.

WN61 MESSAGE FILE


ADDRESS DUPLICATE

Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.

WN62 MESSAGE FILE


NUMBER ERROR

Correct the error in the message file for multilanguage display.

WN57 OVERRIDE
FUNCTION IS ACTIVE

- 149 -

Contents
The ladder program was stopped
while communication was in
progress between CNC and
PMC.
This alarm may cause the
WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, and
DISPB functional instructions to
malfunction.
There are too many levels of
nesting (levels more than 8) for
the CALL or CALLU functional
instruction to call the
subprogram.
You have changed the sequence
program using the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or
DATA I/O screen, but you have
not yet written the changed
sequence program to flash ROM.
If you shut down the system
without writing the changed
sequence program to flash ROM,
the changes you have made will
be lost next time you turn on the
power.
No step sequence option was
found when the system
attempted to execute a step
sequence.
An incompatible functional
instruction is used in the
sequence program.
The Override function is
activated.
An unsupported functional
instruction is used in the
sequence program. The
functional instruction was
skipped.
In the message file for multilanguage display, a symbol that
does not exist in the ladder is
defined.
In the message file for multilanguage display, a symbol other
than an A address is defined.
The A address area has a
duplicate definition between a
symbol and address or between
symbols.
A message number differs
between the ladder and message
file for multi-language display at
the same A address.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Alarm number

B-85314EN-1/01

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

WN63 MESSAGE FILE IS


NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH
ROM

If you want to use the current message file for


multi-language display next time you power on
the system, write the message file to flash
ROM.

WN64 MESSAGE FILE SIZE


OVER

<1> Reduce the size of the message file for


multi-language display.
<2> Contact us and specify an option for a
larger size.

WN65 MESSAGE FILE


MISMATCH

Contact us.

WN66 MESSAGE FILE


PARITY

<1> Enter the message file for multi-language


display again.
<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the message file for multilanguage display again, the error may be
due to a hardware fault. In that case,
contact us.
Enter the message file for multi-language
display again.

You have changed the message


data for multi-language display
using DATA I/O screen, but you
have not yet written the changed
message data to flash ROM. If
you shut down the system
without writing the changed
message data to flash ROM, the
changes you have made will be
nowhere next time you turn on
the power.
The message file for multilanguage display is too large to
load into the save area.
The message file for multilanguage display is invalid.
An unsupported function is used
in the message file for multilanguage display.
The parity of the message file for
multi-language display is invalid.

WN67 MESSAGE FILE


ERROR BY I/O
WN68 I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA IS NOT WRITTEN TO
FLASH ROM

If you want to make updated I/O configuration


data effective, write the data to Flash ROM.

- 150 -

Reading the message file for


multi-language display was
interrupted.
The I/O configuration data was
updated in the I/O configuration
editor screen or data I/O screen
but the data has not been written
to Flash ROM yet. The data will
be lost if the save operation is not
performed.

B-85314EN-1/01

Alarm number
WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM
(CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm
Ybbb = **H )
(Note1)

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Faulty location/corrective action
Check DO of the relevant device.

Contents
The DO alarm (ex. a short circuit
with the ground) occurs at byte
zz of slot yy of group xx in
channel n.
Y bbbb of PMC path m is the
address at which the alarm
occurred.
DCSPMC Ybbbb is the address
for DCSPMC.
Display of PMC*Y**** is the
case of occurrence of
unassigned address.

WN70 I/O Link i STATUS


ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz =
**H)
(Note1)

Check the alarm information of applied I/O


device.

The **H shows some bits at


which the alarm occurs by
hexadecimal.
(Ex. PMC1Y115=28H shows
the alarm occurs at Y115.3 and
Y115.5 in PMC1. 28H means
00101000 in binary. )
For the details of the alarm of I/O
devices, refer to the
CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE).
The status alarm except for the
DO alarm occurs at byte zz of
slot yy of group xx in channel
n.
The **H shows some bits at
which the alarm occurs by
hexadecimal.
For the details of the alarm of I/O
devices, refer to the
CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE).

NOTE
1 The displayed group number in ER34, ER35, ER36, ER38, ER39, ER61, ER68,
ER71, ER97, WN69 and WN70 is wiring number of I/O device.
2 The group number displayed in ER69 is the number of I/O Link i assignment
data.
3 When some PMC alarms related to I/O Link and I/O Link i occur, all of I/O
devices in all of channels do not be liked with the CNC.

- 151 -

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

15.2

B-85314EN-1/01

PMC System Alarm Messages

Error Messages when SYS_ALM199 (PMC General)


Alarm number
PC004 CPU INVALID INSTRUCTION
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC006 CPU INVALID SLOT
INSTRUCTION
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC009 CPU ADDRESS ERROR
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC010 DMA ADDRESS ERROR
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC012 CPU USER BREAK
EXCEPTION
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC030 RAM PARITY
PC030 S-RAM PARITY
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC060 BUS ERROR
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE (PMCn)
PC070 LADDER SPE(PMCm)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE (PMCn)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (TASK:xx)
PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (INT:xx)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC080 SYSTEM EMERGENCY
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
-----------------------------------------

Faulty location/corrective action


This alarm may be due to a main
board fault.

Contents
A CPU error occurred in the PMC
system.

A RAM parity error occurred in


the PMC system.

A bus error occurred in the PMC


system.

A stack error occurred with the


SPE functional instruction of the
ladder program of n path.

A stack error occurred with the


FBE functional instruction of the
ladder program of path n.
A stack error occurred. (detected
by the software).

System emergency state of the


PMC LSI.

- 152 -

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Alarm number

Faulty location/corrective action

PC090 SYSTEM EMERGENCY


(SOFTWARE)
PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT
(SOFTWARE)
PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT
(UNKNOWN)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC093 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT
(xx)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC094 UNEXPECTED TRAP
EXCEPTION (xx)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR
(PMCn)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC096 LADDER CODE ERROR (___)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC097 LADDER CRC ERROR (PMCm)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC098 PMC SOFTWARE CRC ERROR
PC098 PMC SOFTWARE ECC ERROR
(_____:_)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
----------------------------------------PC501 CNC/PMC INTERFACE ERROR
(PATHn)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
-----------------------------------------

Contents
CPU error (unexpected NMI)
occurs in PMC control software.

A trap exception of unknown


cause occurred with the PMC
control software.

RAM check error occurred.

The read or write operation


between CNC and PMC failed

- 153 -

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error Messages when SYS_ALM197 (PMC General)


Alarm number
PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE
(DCSPMC)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD
----------------------------------------PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE
(DCSPMC)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD
----------------------------------------PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR
(DCSPMC)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD
----------------------------------------PC097 LADDER PARITY ERR
(DCSPMC)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----CPU CARD
-----------------------------------------

Faulty location/corrective action


This alarm may be due to a CPU
card fault.

Contents
A stack error occurred with the
SPE functional instruction of the
ladder program of DCSPMC.

A stack error occurred with the


FBE functional instruction of the
ladder program of DCSPMC.

RAM check error occurred.

Error Messages when SYS_ALM196 (PMC Watch Dog)


Alarm number
PC073 WATCH-DOG ALARM(CNC<>PMC)
-----< ERROR POSITION >----MAIN BOARD
-----------------------------------------

Faulty location/corrective action


This alarm may be due to a main
board fault.

Contents
The PMC CPU is not running.

Error Messages when SYS_ALM195 (I/O Link)


Alarm number
PC050 I/O Link ER1 CHn:GRxx:yy
COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn :
GROUP xx
-----< ERROR POSITION>----CHn / GROUPxx
----------------------------------------

Faulty location/corrective action


<1> Check the I/O device of group
xx in channel n
Instantaneous power failure
Unstable power line
<2> Check the I/O Link cable
between JD1B of group xx
and JD1A of group xx-1
faulty wiring
incomplete contact
<3> The I/O Link device of group
xx in channel n is faulty.

- 154 -

Contents
An I/O Link communication error
occurred.
n is a channel number (1 to 3).
xx is a group number (0 to 15).
yy is a internal error code.
This error occurs when the
communication with the device of
group xx in channel n is
stopped.
The causes are as follows:
Instantaneous power failure,
unstable voltage or unstable
power line of the device
Faulty wiring or incomplete
contact of communication cable
Faulty device
Please note that It may not show
an accurate group number with
some conditions of the problem.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Alarm number

Faulty location/corrective action

PC051 I/O Link ER2 CHn:yy:xx:ww:vv


COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn
-----< ERROR POSITION>----CHn
----------------------------------------

<1> When you use an I/O UnitModel A, no base extension


unit is connected corresponding
to an I/O assignment data.
Check connection of I/O
devices and I/O assignment
data.
<2> When you use Power Mate as
I/O Link slave device and/or
Servo Motor Beta series I/O
Link option, some system alarm
occurs in such devices.
<3> A Communication may be
influenced by noise. Check the
ground wire and the shield of
the communication cables.
<4> The output of the I/O Link
devices is short-circuited.
<5> The power of the I/O Link
master and/or slave devices is
faulty.
Instantaneous power failure
Unstable power line
<6> Incomplete contact of the
communication cable
<7> Faulty wiring of the
communication cable
<8> Check the grounding of the
shield wire of the earth terminal
or the communication cable of
I/O devices.
<9> I/O Link devices are faulty.
<10>I/O Link master is faulty.
n=1,2: main board
n=3: CPU card

Contents
An I/O Link communication error
occurred.
n is a channel number (1 to 3).
yy, xx, ww and vv are
internal error code.
There are various causes as for
this error.

Error Messages when SYS_ALM194 (I/O Link i)


Alarm number
PC052 I/O Link I
PMC LSI RAM PARITY ERROR
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------MAIN BORAD
--------------------------------------------------PC053 I/O Link I
SLAVE LSI RAM PARITY ERROR
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : Unit name
(Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC054 I/O Link I
ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : Unit name
(Note)
---------------------------------------------------

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

Change the main board.

A RAM parity error occurred in


PMC LSI on the main board.

Change the I/O device of the unit.

A RAM parity error occurred in


yth unit (group x) of channel
n.

Check the power supply of the I/O


unit.

A power disconnection alarm


occurred in the yth unit (group
x) of channel n.

- 155 -

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Alarm number

Faulty location/corrective action

PC055 I/O Link I


I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / CNC <-> UNIT1(GROUP0)
CNC : MAIN BOARD
UNIT1 : Unit name (Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC055 I/O Link I
I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1) <->
UNITy(GROUPx)
UNITy 1 : Unit name (Note1)
UNITy : Unit name (Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC056 I/O Link I
I/O Link I DISCONNECTION
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / CNC <-> UNIT1(GROUP0)
CNC : MAIN BOARD
UNITy : Unit name (Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC056 I/O Link I
I/O Link I DISCONNECTION
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1)<->
UNITy(GROUPx)
UNITy 1 : Unit name (Note1)
UNITy : Unit name (Note1)
--------------------------------------------------PC057 I/O Link I
SAFETY I/O ALARM
-----< ERROR POSITION >----UNITy : unit name (Note 1)
----------------------------------------PC058 I/O Link I
SLAVE LSI EXTERNAL ALARM
-----< ERROR POSITION>---------------CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : Unit name
(Note1)
---------------------------------------------------

Check whether any noise is inserted


between the CNC and 1st unit.
Check the ground status of the
slave device and the contact of the
connection cable.

A communication error occurred


between the CNC and 1st unit
(group 0) of channel n.

Contents

Check whether there any noise is


inserted between the y-1th unit
(group x-1) and yth unit (group
x). Check the ground status of the
slave device and the contact of the
connection cable.

A communication error occurred


between the y-1th unit (group x1) and the yth unit (group x) of
channel n.

Check whether there is


disconnection or incomplete contact
for the cable between the CNC and
1st unit (group 0).

Connection error occurred


between the CNC and 1st unit
(group 0) of channel n.

Check whether there is


disconnection or incomplete contact
of the cable between the y-1th unit
(group x-1) and yth unit (group
x).

Connection error occurred


between the y-1th unit (group x1) and yth unit (group x) of
channel n.

Change the I/O device of the unit. If


the error still occurs, change the
main board.

A hardware failure of the safety


I/O occurred between the CNC
and the yth unit.

Change the I/O device of the unit.

A hardware failure occurred on


the yth unit (group x) of
channel n.

NOTE
1 When an unknown unit is connected, the hardware ID is displayed.
2 For some I/O devices, one unit such as a safety I/O unit may consist of two
groups. If a connection failure occurs between groups containing units of the
same type, PC058 instead of PC056 indicating a connection failure occurs as a
unit failure.

- 156 -

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

15.3

Operation Errors

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM


VIEWER screen
Message
INPUT INVALID
LADDER PROGRAM IS
PROTECTED BY PASSWORD
ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME

Faulty location/corrective action


Input a valid address or numeric
value.
Enter the password.

SYMBOL UNDEFINED

Input a existent subprogram number


or symbol.
Input a defined symbol or bit address.

THE NET IS NOT FOUND


THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND
THE FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND
WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT
ADDRESS

Specify a bit address for the write coil


search.

SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED

PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED
CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION
BLOCK

The system cannot pick up all the


nets. Choose the nets to pick up, by
using the LADDER DIAGRAM
VIEWER display screen, and then
perform the net pickup operation
manually.
Disconnect the online communication
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the
ladder data.
Cancel the protection by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit
function block.

- 157 -

Contents
The input address or numeric value is
invalid.
The screen cannot be displayed
because the program is protected by
the password.
A nonexistent subprogram number or
symbol is specified.
An undefined symbol character string
is specified.
The specified net is not found.
The specified address is not found.
The specified functional instruction is
not found.
You entered a byte address when
specifying an address used for the
write coil search.
The system failed to pick up all the
nets because there were 128 nets or
more to be picked up.

The ladder data cannot be displayed


because online communication with
FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
another application is accessing the
ladder data.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.
You tried to edit the FB body
program.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM


EDITOR screen
Message

Faulty location/corrective action

THIS NET IS PROTECTED

TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY

TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE

BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED


BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS

Reduce the range of data to copy.


Perform the copy operation several
times, copying a smaller range of data
at a time.
Reduce the size of data to paste.

Make sure that the address types


match for the alteration operation.
Make sure that the address types
match for the alteration operation.
Check the address to be input, and
then enter it correctly.

THIS ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY

Enter a write-permitted address.

THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE


MISMATCHED

Check the types of the address in


"OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW
ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter
the correct address or addresses.
Define symbol data in "OLD
ADDRESS".
Make sure that the address types
match for the alteration operation.
Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit
function block.
Cut nets which do not include any
function block.
Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit
function block.
Copy nets which do not include any
function block.
Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit
function block.
Use NET EDITOR screen.

***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL


***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL
CANNOT CUT FUNCTION
BLOCK

CANNOT COPY FUNCTION


BLOCK

CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION


BLOCK
CANNOT INPUT AT THIS
SCREEN
CANNOT EDIT INPUT/OUTPUT
PARAM ADDRESS

- 158 -

Contents
When you are editing data on a persubprogram basis, you cannot edit
the subprogram frame nets (END1,
END2, END3, SP, and SPE).
The selected range of data exceeds
the size of the copy buffer.

An attempt was made to paste data


whose size exceeded the free space
of the sequence program.
An attempt was made to alter a bit
address to a byte address.
An attempt was made to alter a byte
address to a bit address.
A character string was entered that
was unacceptable as a PMC
address.
A wildcard (*) was specified in an
inappropriate manner.
Either "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" was not entered.
An attempt was made to alter a
write coil address to a writeprohibited bit address.
An attempt was made to alter an
address set in an output parameter
of a functional instruction to a writeprohibited bit address.
The type of the addresses in "OLD
ADDRESS" does not match that in
"NEW ADDRESS".
No symbol data is defined for "OLD
ADDRESS".
Symbol data is already defined for
"NEW ADDRESS".
You tried to cut the net including the
function block.

You tried to copy the net including the


function block.

You tried to edit the FB body


program.
You tried to set an address in the
output section that is omitted in the
function block.
An address in the input section of an
input/output parameter in the function
block cannot be changed.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Message

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents
When the input parameter of the
function block is plural data type, any
constant cannot be set.

NO CONSTANT TO
PARAMETER OF PLURAL
TYPE

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM


EDITOR screen (when updating)
Message
OVERLAPPED COM

END IN COM
END1 IN COM
END2 IN COM
JMPE IN COM

SP/SPE IN COM

COME WITHOUT COM

COME NOT FOUND AFTER


COM
DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER
(WARN)

ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER

Faulty location/corrective action


If COME is missing, add it in proper
position. If the COM is unnecessary,
remove it.
If COME is missing, add it in proper
position. If COM is unnecessary,
remove it.
JMPE and corresponding JMP must
have same COM/COME status. Review
JMP range and COM range, to adjust
not to overlap with each other: it is
possible that one range includes the
other completely.
If COME is missing, add it in proper
position. If the COM is unnecessary,
remove it.
If COM is missing, add it in proper
position. If the COME is unnecessary,
remove it.
If COME is missing, add it in proper
position. If the COM is unnecessary,
remove it.
If some of them are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of them are
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them
unique. (If two or more instructions with
same parameter number will never be
active simultaneously at one time, the
Ladder program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
If unnecessary, remove it. Assign
correct number not to exceed the
maximum number defined by each PMC
model.

- 159 -

Contents
There is no COME that corresponds
to this COM.
END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
between COM and COME.
JMPE is found between COM and
COME, and JMP and corresponding
JMPE have different COM/COME
status.

SP or SPE is found between COM


and COME.
There is no COM that corresponds to
this COME.
There is no COME that corresponds
to this COM.
Plural CTRs have the same number
as their parameter. (This is warning.)

CTR has parameter number that is


out of range.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Message
DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD
NUMBER
(WARN)

ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER

NO END
NO END1
NO END2
NO END3
DUPLICATE END1
DUPLICATE END2
DUPLICATE END3
GARBAGE AFTER END
GARBAGE AFTER END2
GARBAGE AFTER END3
OVERLAPPED JMP

JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM


LEVEL

COME IN JMP

END IN JMP
END1 IN JMP
END2 IN JMP
END3 IN JMP
SP/SPE IN JMP

JMPB OVER COM BORDER

B-85314EN-1/01

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

If some of them are unnecessary,


remove them. If all of them are
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them
unique. (If two or more instructions with
same parameter number will never be
active simultaneously at one time, the
Ladder program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
If unnecessary, remove it. Assign
correct number not to exceed the
maximum number defined by each PMC
model.
Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in
proper position.

Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same


number as their parameter. (This is
warning.)

Remove extra END1, END2 or END3.

Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are


found.

Remove unnecessary nets, and move


necessary nets to proper position so
that they will be executed.
If JMPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the JMP is unnecessary,
remove it.
JMP and corresponding JMPE must
have same COM/COME status. Review
JMP range and COM range, to adjust
not to overlap with each other: it is
possible that one range includes the
other completely.
COME and corresponding COM must
have same JMP/JMPE status. Review
COM range and JMP range, to adjust
not to overlap with each other: it is
possible that one range includes the
other completely.
If JMPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove
it.

There are some nets after END,


END2 or END3, which will not be
executed.
There is no JMPE that corresponds to
this JMP.

If JMPE is missing, add it in proper


position. If the JMP is unnecessary,
remove it.
JMPB and its destination must have
same COM/COME status. Review range
of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.

SP or SPE is found between JMP and


JMPE.

- 160 -

DIFU or DIFD has parameter number


that is out of range.

END, END1, END2 or END3 is not


found.

JMP and corresponding JMPE have


different COM/COME status.

COME is found between JMP and


JMPE, and COM and corresponding
COME have different JMP/JMPE
status.

END,END1,END2, or END3 is found


between JMP and JMPE.

JMPB and its destination differ in


COM/COME status.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Message
JMPB OVER LEVEL

LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND


JMPC IN BAD LEVEL

LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND

LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD


LEVEL

JMPC INTO COM

JMPE WITHOUT JMP

JMPE NOT FOUND AFTER


JMP
TOO MANY LBL

DUPLICATE LBL

OVERLAPPED SP

SPE WITHOUT SP

SPE NOT FOUND AFTER SP

END IN SP

Faulty location/corrective action


JMPB can only jump to the same
program level, or within a subprogram. If
the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC,
correct it.
If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL is missing, add it in proper position.
JMPC is used to jump from a
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If it should be
JMPB or JMP, correct it.
If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL is missing, add it in proper position:
JMPC jumps into level 2.
JMPC is used to jump from a
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL
of same L-address that the JMPC is
intended to jump exists in the
subprogram, assign different L-address
to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB
or JMP, correct it.
LBL for JMPC must be located out of
any COM and COME pair. If the JMPC
is unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is
located wrong, move it to correct
position. If the L-address of JMPC is
wrong, correct it.
If JMP is missing, add it in proper
position. If the JMPE is unnecessary,
remove it.
If JMPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the JMP is unnecessary,
remove it.
Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error
still occurs, adjust the construction of
program to use less LBLs.
If some of these LBLs are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of these LBLs is
necessary, assign other L-addresses to
them to make all LBLs unique.
If SPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the SP is unnecessary,
remove it.
If SP is missing, add it in proper
position. If the SPE is unnecessary,
remove it.
If SPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the SP is unnecessary,
remove it.
If SPE is missing, add it in proper
position. If END is in wrong place, move
it to proper position.

- 161 -

Contents
JMPB jumps to different program
level.

Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.


JMPC is used in other than
subprogram.

Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.

Destination of JMPC is not level 2.

JMPC jumps to LBL between COM


and COME.

There is no JMP that corresponds to


this JMPE.
There is no JMPE that corresponds to
this JMP.
There are too many LBLs.

Same L-address is used in plural


LBLs.

There is no SPE that corresponds to


this SP.
There is no SP that corresponds to
this SPE.
There is no SPE that corresponds to
this SP.
END is found between SP and SPE.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Message
DUPLICATE P ADDRESS

DUPLICATE TMRB/TMRBF
NUMBER
(WARN)

ILLEGAL TMRB/TMRBF
NUMBER

DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER


(WARN)

ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER

NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM
UNAVAILABLE
INSTRUCTION

SP IN BAD LEVEL

LADDER PROGRAM IS
BROKEN
NO WRITE COIL
CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL

Faulty location/corrective action


If some of these SPs are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of these SPs is
necessary, assign other P-addresses to
them to make all SPs unique.
If some of them are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of them are
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them
unique. (If two or more instructions with
same parameter number will never be
active simultaneously at one time, the
Ladder program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
If unnecessary, remove it. Assign
correct number not to exceed the
maximum number defined by each PMC
model.
If some of them are unnecessary,
remove them. If all of them are
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them
unique. (If two or more instructions with
same parameter number will never be
active simultaneously at one time, the
Ladder program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
If unnecessary, remove it. Assign
correct number not to exceed the
maximum number defined by each PMC
model.
If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If
the subprogram is missing, create it.
Confirm that this ladder program is
correct one. If this program is correct
one, all these unsupported instructions
have to be removed.
SP can be used at top of a subprogram.
Correct it so that no SP exists in other
place.
This ladder program must be all cleared
once, and remake ladder program.
Add proper write coil.
CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2
or in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.

- 162 -

B-85314EN-1/01

Contents
Same P-address is used in plural
SPs.

Plural TMRBs/TMRBFs have the


same number as their parameter.
(This is warning.)

TMRB/TMRBF has parameter


number that is out of range.

Plural TMRs have the same number


as their parameter. (This is warning.)

TMR has parameter number that is


out of range.

Subprogram that is called by


CALL/CALLU is not found.
Unsupported instruction for this PMC
model is found.

SP is found in wrong place.

Ladder program may be broken by


some reason.
Write coil is necessary, but is not
found.
CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Message
SP IN LEVEL3

CS/CM/CE IN COM

CS/CM/CE IN BAD LEVEL

CM/CE WITHOUT CS

INSTRUCTION EXCEPT CM
IN CS
OVERLAPPED CS

FB BODY PROGRAM IS
BLOKEN

Faulty location/corrective action


If END3 is located wrong, move it to
correct position. If the SP is
unnecessary, remove it.
If COME is missing, add it in proper
position. If the COM is unnecessary,
remove it.
CS, CM or CE must be used in Level 2
or in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
If CS is missing, add it in proper
position. If the CM or CE is
unnecessary, remove it.
If CE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the instruction other than CM
is unnecessary, remove it.
If CE is missing, add it in proper
position. If the CS is unnecessary,
remove it.
The ladder program must be deleted
and remake it.

Contents
SP is found in level 3.

CS,CM or CE is found between COM


and COME.
CS,CM, or CE is used in wrong place.

There is no CS that corresponds to


this CM or CE.
Instruction except CM is found
between CS and CE.
There is no CE that corresponds to
this CS.
FB body program is broken.

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen
Message
ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION NAME
TOO MANY FUNCTION IN
ONE NET
TOO LARGE NET

NO INPUT FOR OPERATION

OPERATION AFTER
FUNCTION IS FORBIDDEN

WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED

BAD COIL LOCATION

SHORT CIRCUIT

FUNCTION AFTER
DIVERGENCE IS
FORBIDDEN

Faulty location/corrective action


Specify the name of an available
functional instruction.
Only one functional instruction is
allowed to constitute a net. If necessary,
divide the net into plural nets.
Divide the net into plural nets so that
step number in a net may become
small.
Coil without input, or coil connected to
output of functional instruction that has
no output, causes this error. If coil is not
necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
Output of functional instruction can not
be connected to a contact, nor to
conjunction with other signal that will be
implemented by logical-or operation.
Write coil is not found even if it is
expected. Add proper write coil to the
net.
Coil can be located only at rightmost
column. Any coil located at other place
must be erased once, and place
necessary coils in correct place.
Find contact with terminals connected
by short circuit, and correct connections.
Functional instruction can not be used in
output section of net. If necessary,
divide the net into plural nets.

- 163 -

Contents
The entered name of functional
instruction is invalid.
Too many functional instructions are
in one net.
Net is too large. When a net is
converted into the object, the net
exceeds 256 steps.
No signal is provided for logical
operation.

No logical operation with functional


instruction output is permitted, except
write coils.
Write coil is expected, but not found.

Coil is located in bad position.

Some contacts are connected with


short circuit. CTR has a parameter
number that is out of the range.
Functional instruction is used in
output section of net.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Message

Faulty location/corrective action

ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME


INPUT

Left terminals of all coils in a net must


be connected to same input point.

BAD CONDITION INPUT

Check the connection of all condition


inputs of the functional instruction.
Especially for functional instruction that
has more than one condition input,
check if connections to condition inputs
interfere with each other.
Correct the connection where is not
connected.
Examine every connection, and find
unnecessarily bending connection, or
coils that are connected to different
point.
Enter all of the relay addresses, and
parameters of functional instructions.

NO CONNECTION
NET IS TOO COMPLICATED

PARAMETER IS NOT
SUPPLIED
TOO LARGE DATA FOR NETEDITOR
TOO MANY FUNCTIONS FOR
NET-EDITOR
BAD DIAGRAM STRUCTURE

NOT SUPPORT ENHANCED


LADDER DIAGRAM

TOO COMPLICATED
CIRCUIT
AROUND FUNCTION

CONNECT OUTPUT TO COIL


DIRECTLY

Change for being to modify net by


[NEXT NET] soft key.
Change for being to modify net by
[NEXT NET] soft key.
Examine every connection, and find the
error of connection of relay or functional
instruction.
Replace other functional instruction
which supports Structure of extended
type net.
Or, change the ladder net construction
not to be Structure of extended type net.
The circuit lines branched from a
conditional input for some functional
instruction must reach the right power
line without joining the output line from
the functional instruction.
Refer to 8.3.4.3.
Connect the output of the functional
instruction directly to a coil.

SINGLE COIL IS EXPECTED

This functional instruction must have


single coil directly connected to the
output.

INVALID CIRCUIT FOR FB


PARAMETER

Specify the name of contact and coil for


the parameter of function block.

NO CONNECTION
PARAMETER IS NOT
SUPPLIED

Connect the broken connection.


Specify an address.

CAN NOT PLACE FB AND


FUNCTION IN ONE NET
NO ASSIGNMENT TO FB
CONTACT

Delete the functional instruction placed


on the same net as the function block.
Specify a contact.

- 164 -

B-85314EN-1/01

Contents
When a net contains more than one
coil, the coils should not have any
contact beside them affects only of
the coils.
Some condition input of functional
instruction is not connected correctly.

The elements ,such as contacts and


coils, are not connected..
Net is too complicated to analyze.

Relay with blank address, or blank


parameter of functional instruction, is
found.
The net data in net editor screen is
too large.
There are too many functional
instructions in net editor screen.
Circuit is too complicated to analyze.

The ladder net Structure of extended


type net contains a functional
instruction which does not support
Structure of extended type net.
The circuit construction around
functional
instruction is too complicated.

The output of the functional


instruction is not
connected directly to a coil.
A functional instruction has multiple
coils
connected to its output which are
prohibited.
The functional instruction is
connected to the parameter of
function block.
The connection is broken.
The address is not assigned to the
input section and the coil of output
section of a function block.
A functional instruction is placed on
the same net as the function block.
The contact is not assigned in the
input section for a BOOL type of the
function block.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen
Message

Faulty location/corrective action

TOO MANY
CHARACTERS

Make sure that the entered character


string is within the allowable input length.

PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

Disconnect the online communication with


FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the title data.

THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

Cancel the protection by the programmer


protection function or 8-level protection
function.

Contents
The number of characters in the entered
character string exceeds the allowable
input length. Some of the characters are
discarded.
The title data cannot be displayed
because online communication with
FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
another application is accessing the title
data.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8-level
protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen
Message

Faulty location/corrective action

TOO MANY
CHARACTERS

Make sure that the entered address is


within the allowable input length.

ADDRESS IS
REQUIRED

Enter data in a batch correctly, as


instructed in "Editing a set of symbol and
comment data" in Subsection 9.2.2.

ILLEGAL PMC
ADDRESS

Enter an address correctly.

THE ADDRESS
ALREADY HAS AN
ENTRY
THE SYMBOL NAME IS
ALREADY USED
PMC ADDRESS MUST
BE ENTERED
TOO LONG SYMBOL
NAME
TOO LONG COMMENT
STRING
THE STRING IS NOT
FOUND
OUT OF SPACE

Specify another address.

PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED
BAD SYMBOL NAME

Specify another symbol.


Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS
field.
Make sure that the symbol consists of 16
characters or less.
Make sure that the comment consists of 30
characters or less.
Specify another character string for the
search.
Create free space for the sequence
program, by deleting unnecessary ladder
or message data.
Disconnect the online communication with
FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the
symbol/comment data.
Cancel the protection by the programmer
protection function or 8-level protection
function.
Change the symbol name.

- 165 -

Contents
The number of characters in the entered
address exceeds the allowable address
input length.
No address was entered during the batch
input of address, symbol, and comment
data using the SYMBOL & COMMENT
EDITOR screen.
The specified address is invalid, or the
entered address character string
contains a space or spaces.
An already registered address was
entered.
An already registered symbol was
entered.
No PMC address was entered when new
symbol/comment data is registered.
The entered symbol exceeds the
specified number of characters.
The entered comment exceeds the
specified number of characters.
The search was done for the specified
character string but did not find it.
The symbol/comment editing area has no
free space.
The symbol/comment data cannot be
displayed because online communication
with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress
or another application is accessing the
symbol/comment data.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8-level
protection function.
The symbol name is invalid.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Message
CANNOT EDIT
ADDRESS AUTO
ASSIGNED SYMBOL
ILLEGAL DATA TYPE
ILLEGAL PROGRAM
NAME
LINE FEED IS NOT
AVAILABLE IN THIS
DATA
LINE FEED IS NOT
AVAILABLE IN THIS
MODE
NO SYMBOL.
PROGRAM SETTING IS
IGNORED
NOTHING TO PASTE
TOO LARGE DATA TO
PASTE
UNAVAILABLE
CHARACTERS WAS
OMITTED.

Faulty location/corrective action


Use FANUC LADDER-III to change the
symbol.

B-85314EN-1/01

Enter a correct data type.


Enter a correct program name.

Contents
The symbol whose PMC address is
assigned automatically by compiling
FANUC LADDER-III, can not edit.
The specified data type is invalid.
The specified program is invalid.

Line feed code can be entered in comment


data only. Do not enter it in other data.

Line feed code cannot be entered in this


data.

Enter Line feed code in the insert or


overwrite mode.

Line feed code cannot be entered in this


mode.

Symbol name is required for local symbol.

The specified program is ignored


because no symbol is specified.

You need to copy or cut character strings


before you paste them.
Shorten the character string to copy or cut.

You try to paste character strings without


copying or cutting ones.
The character strings is too long to copy
or cut.
The characters which can not be used at
pasted position, were omitted.

Do not copy or cut characters which


cannot be used at pasted position.

Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR


screen
Message

Faulty location/corrective action

INPUT INVALID

Correct the message number.


Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the
batch message input process.

ILLEGAL NUMBER

Enter a four-digit number as the message


number.

THE NUMBER IS OUT OF


RANGE

Enter the number in the range from 0 to


4095 for the message number of the
format with path number, and 1000 to
9999 for the message number of other
format.
When entering kana or other Japanese
characters, make sure that they are
enclosed within a pair of @ signs.
Enter a character string correctly between
a pair of @ signs.
Enter a character string correctly between
a pair of @ signs.
Enter a two-byte code correctly between
@02 and 01@.

CLOSING "@" IS NOT


FOUND
BAD NUMBER OF
CHARACTERS IN "@-@"
ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN
"@-@"
BAD NUMBER OF
CHARACTERS FOR 2BYTE CODE
ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE

CLOSING CONTROL
CODE "01" IS NOT
FOUND
CONTROL CODE "XX" IS
REPEATED

Enter a two-byte code correctly between


@02 and 01@.

Enter the closing control code.

Remove any repeated control code.

- 166 -

Contents
The format of the message number is
invalid, or the delimiter code semicolon (;) - was not entered in the
batch message input process.
The entered message number contains
any nonnumeric character, or a number
shorter than four digits was entered.
The entered message number is out of
range.

One of the @ sign pair is missing.

The number of characters entered


between the pair of @ signs is not even.
One or more invalid character codes
exist between the pair of @ signs.
The number of characters in the twobyte code (characters entered between
@02 and 01@) is not a multiple of four.
The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@) contains one
or more characters other than the JIS
codes.
The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@) lacks the
closing control code (01).
The starting control code (02), closing
control code (01), and/or umlaut code
(0D) is repeated.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Message

Faulty location/corrective action

CLOSING "]" IS NOT


FOUND
BAD NUMERICAL DATA
FORMAT
BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR
NUMERIAL DATA
PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes are


entered in pairs.
Specify the numerical data correctly.

THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

Cancel the protection by the programmer


protection function or 8-level protection
function.

Enter an available address.


Disconnect the online communication
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the message
data.

Contents
The delimiter codes for numerical data
are not entered in pairs.
The format of the numerical data is
invalid.
The address section of the numerical
data is invalid.
The message data cannot be displayed
because online communication with
FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
another application is accessing the
message data.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen
Message

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

GROUP NUMBER IS TOO


LARGE
BASE NUMBER IS TOO
LARGE
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO
LARGE

Specify 15 or a smaller value as the


group number.
Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B (##,
#1 - #10).
Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 10 or a
smaller value.
Specify 0 or a large value as the slot
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 1 or a larger
value.
Check the I/O unit name or address.

The entered group number is too large.

SLOT NUMBER IS TOO


SMALL

I/O UNIT NAME


MISMATCH
ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME
NOT ENOUGH SPACE

Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables


3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.
Enter the data again after creating free
space by deleting the data allocated
behind the current cursor position or by
other adequate means.

PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

Disconnect the online communication


with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the I/O
module data.

THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

Cancel the protection by the programmer


protection function or 8-level protection
function.

- 167 -

The entered base number is too large.


The entered slot number is too large.

The entered slot number is too small.

The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y


address, or the output I/O unit is
assigned to the X address.
The entered I/O unit name is invalid.
There is not enough free address space
for the size of the I/O unit you are going
to assign.
This error also occurs if you attempt to
assign the I/O unit to an already
allocated address space.
The I/O module data cannot be
displayed because online
communication with FANUC LADDERIII is in progress or another application
is accessing the I/O module data.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O CONFIGURATION EDITOR


screen
Message

Faulty location/corrective action

TOO MANY GROUPS (CHx)

Delete any unnecessary group, then


create a new group.

TOO MANY SLOTS (CHx)

Delete any unnecessary slot, then


create a new slot.

TOO MANY SLOTS IN A


GROUP (CHx, Gyy)

Delete any unnecessary slot, then


create a new slot.

NO SLOT(Gxx)
SLOT NUMBER IS
REQUIRED
SLOT NUMBER DUPLICATE

Add a slot.
Enter a slot number.

CAN NOT DELETE MPG


SLOT
ILLEGAL SLOT NUMBER
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS

Turn the MPG flag off in the group


setting screen.
Enter a slot number not greater than
32.
Enter a correct PMC address again.

ILLEGAL SIZE

Enter a correct size again.

SLOT HAS NO ASSIGNMENT

Enter a PMC address and size.

ILLEGAL COMMENT

Enter a correct comment again.

PMC ADDRESS
OVERLAPPED (PMCm
X(Y)nnnn)
TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS
(CHx, Gyy)

Enter the PMC address or size so that


it is set only once.

TOO MANY INPUT POINTS


(CHx, Gyy)

Reduce the number of input points of


the group.

TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS


(CHx)

Reduce the number of output points in


the channel.

TOO MANY INPUT POINTS


(CHx)

Reduce the number of input points in


the channel.

TOO MANY CHARACTERS

Enter a comment within the input field.

THE ADDRESS IS NOT


FOUND
INPUT INVALID

Enter a correct numeric value.

Change the slot number used more


than once.

Reduce the number of output points of


the group.

- 168 -

Contents
A new group cannot be created
because the maximum number of
groups per channel is exceeded.
A new slot cannot be created because
the maximum number of slots per
channel (256 slots) is exceeded.
A new slot cannot be created because
the maximum number of slots per
channel (32 slots) is exceeded.
There is no slot in group Gxx.
No slot number is entered for a slot.
More than one slot data item having the
same slot number is found in the same
group.
No MPG slot can be deleted in the slot
setting screen.
The entered slot number is greater than
32.
The entered PMC address is invalid.
Alternatively, no PMC address is
entered.
The entered size is outside the PMC
address range.
Alternatively, a value of 0 is entered as
the size.
For a slot, a PMC address or size is not
entered for both DI and DO.
An entered comment does not conform
to the extended symbol and comment
format.
Address PMCm X(Y)nnnn is also
assigned to another slot in I/O Link i
assignment data.
The number of output points of the I/O
Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds
the upper limit (65 bytes by default or
29 bytes for the safety I/O device).
The number of input points of the I/O
Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds
the upper limit (65 bytes by default or
29 bytes for the safety I/O device).
Warning message. The number of I/O
Link i output points set in CHx exceeds
the upper limit.
Warning message. The number of I/O
Link i input points set in CHx exceeds
the upper limit.
The number of characters in an entered
comment exceeds the input width.
The specified address is not found.
A numeric value is invalid.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Message

Faulty location/corrective action

I/O CONFIG DATA IS


BROKEN
TOO MANY SAFETY I/O
GROUPS

Enter an I/O configuration file again.

TOO MANY ASSIGNMENTS


(H.SPEED)(CHn,Gyy)

When a group in the high-speed


transfer cycle mode is connected to
I/O Link i, correct assignment so that
the assignment for each group is
performed within the quartered
transfer timing with referencing
Subsection 3.6.4 Transfer Cycle.
Correct the number of basic groups
for the I/O assignment selection
function of I/O Link i.(0 to 24)
Use addresses X0/Y0 and following.

BASIC GROUP INVALID

UNAVAILABLE ADDRESS
FOR DCSPMC

Reduce the number of I/O Link i


safety I/O groups.

THIS DATA IS BEING


MODIFIED

Disconnect the online communication


with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the I/O
configuration data.

INTERNAL
ERROR(0xCxxxxxxx)

Contact us, and report the displayed


message correctly.

Contents
I/O Link i assignment data is invalid.
Warning message. More than four I/O
Link i safety I/O groups are specified
either on the PMC or DCS side in the
entire system.
Warning message. In CHn, group yy
and following exceed the transfer
capacity limit in transfer timing
assignment processing when the highspeed mode of I/O Link i is used.

The number of basic groups for the I/O


assignment selection function of I/O
Link i is invalid.
Addresses X200/Y200, X400/Y400, or
X600/Y600 and following are assigned
to a group for which DCSPMC is
specified for the PMC path.
I/O configuration data cannot be
displayed because online
communication with FANUC LADDERIII is in progress or another application
is accessing the I/O configuration data.
This error occurs due to an internal
factor. An error code is indicated in
parentheses.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen


Message
INPUT INVALID
SYMBOL UNDEFINED

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

Enter a numerical value correctly, as


instructed in Section 9.8.
Enter a defined symbol or bit address.

The entered numerical value or its input


format is invalid.
An undefined symbol character string
was entered.
The system parameter data cannot be
displayed because online
communication with FANUC LADDERIII is in progress or another application
is accessing the system parameter
data.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

PROGRAM IS BEING
MODIFIED

Disconnect the online communication


with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other
applications from accessing the
system parameter data.

THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

Cancel the protection by the


programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen


Message
INPUT INVALID

SYMBOL UNDEFINED
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

Enter a numerical value correctly, as


instructed in "Screen operations using
other keys" in Subsection 7.1.2.
Enter a defined symbol or bit address.

The entered numerical value or its input


format is invalid.

Cancel the protection by the


programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

- 169 -

An undefined symbol character string


was entered.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen


Message
INPUT INVALID
MUST BE IN EMERGENCY
STOP OR IN MDI MODE
PWE MUST BE ON
EITHER PWE OR KEY4 MUST
BE ON
THIS FUNCTION IS
PROTECTED

Faulty location/corrective action


Enter a numerical value correctly, as
instructed in Section 7.3.
Set a mode to MDI or emergency
stop.
Set the PWE to 1 in NC setting
screen.
Set the PWE to 1 in NC setting
screen or set the key KEY4 to 1.
Cancel the protection by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

Contents
The entered numerical value or its
input format is invalid.
The status of NC is not MDI mode or
emergency stop.
The PWE in NC setting screen
is 0.
The PWE in NC setting screen is 0
or the program protect key KEY4
is 0.
This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8level protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen


Message
TRACE FUNCTION IS
ALREADY IN USE
NO SAMPLING ADDRESS
NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS

NO SAMPLING TRIGGER
ADDRESS
USB MEMORY IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION.
USB MEMORY IS NOT READY.
USB MEMORY IS FULL.
USB MEMORY HAS BEEN
REMOVED
USB MEMORY IS NOT
FORMATTED
USB HARDWARE ERROR
(xxxxxxxxxx)

INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or


some other application finishes using
the trace function before executing it.
Specify a bit address as a sampling
address in the trace parameter.
Specify a bit address as the stop
trigger address in the trace
parameter.
Specify a bit address as the sampling
trigger address in the trace
parameter.
Terminate another function that is
using the USB memory, then perform
operation again.
Check whether a USB memory is
inserted.
Delete any unnecessary files and
allocate a required capacity.
Insert the USB memory, then execute
input/output operation again.
Replace the USB memory with
another one.
Replace the USB memory with
another one. If this error still occurs
after replacement, contact us, and
report the displayed message
correctly.
Contact us, and report the displayed
message correctly.

FANUC LADDER-III or some other


application is currently using the trace
function.
No sampling address is specified in
the trace parameter.
The stop trigger address is not
specified in the trace parameter.

- 170 -

The sampling trigger address is not


specified in the trace parameter.
The USB memory is being used by
another function.
No USB memory is inserted.
The USB memory is full.
A USB memory is removed while it is
being accessed.
The inserted USB memory cannot be
recognized.
This error occurs due to a USB
hardware failure. An error code is
indicated in parentheses.

This error occurs due to an internal


factor. An error code is indicated in
parentheses.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen


Message
INPUT INVALID

SYMBOL UNDEFINED
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED
INVALID STOP TRIGGER
ADDRESS
INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER
ADDRESS
UNSUPPORTED TRACE
SETTING FILE
INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINE
n)
SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS
ADJUSTED
UNKNOWN SETTING WAS
SKIPPED(LINE n)
INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS
WAS FOUND
TOO MANY SAMPLING
ADDRESSES

Faulty location/corrective action


Enter a numerical value that is within
the specified data range of the
relevant trace parameter.
Enter a defined symbol or bit address.
Specify a bit address as the stop or
sampling trigger address.
Enter a PMC signal address that can
be used as the stop trigger address.
Enter a PMC signal address that can
be used as the sampling trigger
address.
This file cannot be handled. Set data
in the TRACE SETING screen.
Output the trance setting file again.
Alternatively, set data in the TRACE
SETING screen.
Check the data on the TRACE
SETING screen.
Check the read trace data.
Check the read trace data.
Check the read trace data.

THE FILE IS NOT TRACE


SETTING FILE
FILE NAME CONTAINS
RESERVED WORD.
USB MEMORY IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION.

This file cannot be read. Specify a


correct file.
Correct file name.

USB MEMORY IS NOT READY.

Check whether a USB memory is


inserted.
Insert the USB memory, then execute
input/output operation again.
Replace the USB memory with
another one.
Correct the file name.

USB MEMORY HAS BEEN


REMOVED
USB MEMORY IS NOT
FORMATTED
FILE NAME IS INVALID.
FOLDER NAME CANNOT BE
SPECIFIED.
USB HARDWARE ERROR
(xxxxxxxxxx)

INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)

Terminate another function that is


using the USB memory, then perform
operation again.

A folder name is specified. Specify an


appropriate file name.
Replace the USB memory with
another one. If this error still occurs
after replacement, contact the
FANUC service center, and report the
displayed message correctly.
Contact us, and report the displayed
message correctly.

- 171 -

Contents
A nonnumeric value or an out-ofrange parameter value was entered.
An undefined symbol character string
was entered.
A byte address was specified as the
stop or sampling trigger address.
The bit address entered as the stop
trigger address is invalid.
The bit address entered as the
sampling trigger address is invalid.
Unsupported trace setting file was
read.
An invalid setting was found.
The file may be broken.
The values were adjusted according
to the read data. (This is warning.)
An unknown trace setting item was
found and ignored. (This is warning.)
An invalid sampling address was
found. (This is warning.)
The number of sampling addresses
exceeds the upper limit. (This is
warning.)
An attempt was made to read a file
which was not a trace setting file.
FORFANUC cannot be used in the
top of the file name.
The USB memory is being used by
another function.
Another function is formatting the
USB memory.
No USB memory is inserted.
A USB memory is removed while it is
being accessed.
The inserted USB memory cannot be
recognized.
An invalid character was found in a
file name.
An attempt was made to read or write
a folder.
This error occurs due to a USB
hardware failure. An error code is
indicated in parentheses.

This error occurs due to an internal


factor. An error code is indicated in
parentheses.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O Diagnosis screen


Message
ENTER STRING TO SEARCH.
I/O DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION IS NOT
SUPPORTED
INPUT INVALID
LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN

NO GROUP FORMAT.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED.

Faulty location/corrective action


Enter a string before starting a
search.
To use the I/O diagnosis function,
update the PMC system software.
Check the entered string.
Check the information displayed on
the PMC alarm screen and reload
the program.
Use [GROUP] on the I/O diagnosis
(setting) screen.
Retry after completing the function
that is using the program.

REACHED TO THE END OF


SYMBOL DATA.

To make another search, specify a


string again.

SYMBOL ORDER IS NOT


AVAILABLE.

THE GROUP IS NOT FOUND


FORCING IS PROTECTED ON
THIS PATH.

Use the FANUC LADDER-III to


convert the program to one with the
extended symbol & comment
function.
Check the specified group.
Disable the programmer protection
function.

THE STRING IS NOT FOUND

Check the specified string.

15.4

Contents
No search string is specified.
The I/O diagnosis function cannot
be used because the PMC system
software is an older version.
The entered string is invalid.
The program is broken.

No group display is set.


The program cannot be referenced
because it is being used by another
function.
The search has been completed
until the end of the data has been
reached.
The format of this program does not
allow sorting and display in symbol
order.
The specified group is not found.
The forced input/output function is
currently protected on the selected
PMC path.
The specified string is not found.

I/O Communication Error Messages

The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their meanings and actions are listed below.

Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation


Message

Faulty location/corrective action

MEMORY CARD IS NOT


READY
MEMORYCARD IS FULL

Check whether a memory card is


installed.
Delete files to create available space.

MEMORYCARD IS WRITE
PROTECTED
MEMORYCARD IS NOT
FORMATTED
TOO MANY FILES IN
MEMORYCARD
FILE NOT FOUND

Release the write protection of the


memory card.
Format the memory card.

FILE IS READ-ONLY
FILE NAME IS INVALID
COULD NOT FORMAT
MEMORY CARD

UNSUPPORTED
MEMORYCARD
CAN NOT DELETE FILE

Delete unnecessary files to reduce the


number of files.
On the list screen, check the file name
or file number.
Check the attributes of the file.
Specify the file name in MS-DOS form.
The NC cannot format this memory
card. Use another unit such as a
personal computer to format the
memory card.
Replace the memory card with another
one.
Check the attributes of the file.

- 172 -

Contents
No memory card is installed.
There is no available space in the
memory card.
The memory card is write-protected.
The memory card cannot be
recognized.
There are too many files.
The specified file cannot be found.
Write to the specified file is not
permitted.
The file name is illegal.
The memory card cannot be
formatted.

This memory card is not supported.


An error occurred when a file was
deleted from the memory card.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Message

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

MEMORYCARD BATTERY
ALARM
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY
USED
MEMORYCARD ACCESS
ERROR
DIFFERENCE FOUND

Replace the battery of the memory


card.
Change the file name to another one.

The battery of the memory card has


become weak.
The file name is already used.

Replace the memory card with another


one.

MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY


OTHER FUNCTION
MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL
FILE NUMBER CAN NOT
SELECTED

Wait until the PMC user completes


processing, then retry.
This file cannot be read. Check the
type of the file.
If the file does not exist, the key entry is
invalid. If this error occurs even when
the cursor is placed at a file name,
contact the FANUC service center.
Check the total number of files on the
list screen.

The memory card cannot be


accessed.
File comparison detected a
mismatch.
Another PMC user is using the
memory card.
An attempt was made to read a file,
but its ROM data ID was illegal.
The file number cannot be selected.

THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT


EXIST
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED
TO "128"
MEMORY CARD IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION
MEMORY CARD IS WRITE
PROTECTED
UNSUPPORTED MEMORY
CARD
COULD NOT DELETE FILE
TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER

UNSUPPORTED TRACE
SETTING FILE
INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINE
n)
SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS
ADJUSTED
UNKNOWN SETTING WAS
SKIPPED(LINE n)
INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS
WAS FOUND
TOO MANY SAMPLING
ADDRESSES
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)

Enter a numeric value not exceeding


128.
Retry after terminating the other
function that is currently using the
memory card.
Cancel the write protection of the
memory card, or use another memory
card that is not write protected.
Use another memory card.
Check the read/write permission
attribute of the file.
Delete unnecessary old trace result file
or files.

This file is Invalid. Set data in the


TRACE SETING screen.
Output the trance setting file again.
Alternatively, set data in the TRACE
SETING screen.
Check the data on trace setting screen.
Check the read trace data.
Check the read trace data.
Check the read trace data.

Contact us, and report the displayed


message correctly.

- 173 -

The entered file number is not


present. The entered number
exceeds the total number of files.
A value up to 128 can be entered as
the file number.
Some other function is currently
using the memory card.
The memory card is write protected.

This is an unsupported type of


memory card.
The file cannot be deleted.
No more trace result file can be
created because the maximum trace
result file number (file extension)
has been reached.
Unsupported trace setting file was
read.
Invalid setting value was found.
The file may be broken.
It was adjusted according to the
contents. (This is warning.)
An unknown trace setting item was
found and ignored. (This is warning.)
An invalid sampling address was
found. (This is warning.)
The number of sampling addresses
exceeds the upper limit. (This is
warning.)
An error due to an internal factor
occurred. Details on the error are
displayed in parentheses.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages displayed during USB memory I/O operation


Message
FILE NAME CONTAINS
RESERVED WORD.
USB MEMORY HAS BEEN
REMOVED
USB MEMORY IS NOT READY.
USB MEMORY IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION.
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY
USED. OVERWRITE IT?
FILE NOT FOUND
USB MEMORY IS FULL.
FILE IS READ-ONLY.

USB MEMORY IS NOT


FORMATTED
FILE NAME IS INVALID.

Faulty location/corrective action


Correct file name.
Insert the USB memory, then execute
input/output operation again.
Check whether a USB memory is
inserted.
Terminate another function that is
using the USB memory, then perform
operation again.
Follow the message, and overwrite
the file or specify another file name to
write data.
Check the file name or number on the
file list screen.
Delete any unnecessary files and
allocate a required capacity.
Specify another file or check the file
attribute and delete the read-only
attribute.
Replace the USB memory with
another one.
Correct the file name.

DIFFERENCE FOUND
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT
EXIST

Check the total number of files on the


list screen.

FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED


TO "128"

Enter a numeric value not greater


than 128.

FOLDER CANNOT BE
SPECIFIED.

<1> The specified number indicates a


folder. Enter an appropriate
number.
<2> No folder can be selected in the
file list screen.
<1> The file name corresponding to
the specified file number consists of
more than 32 characters. Enter an
appropriate number.
<2> No file having a file name
consisting of more than 32
characters can be selected in the
file list screen.
Replace the USB memory with
another one. If this error still occurs
after replacement, contact us, and
report the displayed message
correctly.
Contact us, and report the displayed
message correctly.

THIS FILE CANNOT BE


SPECIFIED.

USB HARDWARE ERROR


(xxxxxxxxxx)

INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)

- 174 -

Contents
The string FORFANUC cannot be
used in the top of the file name.
A USB memory is removed while it
is being accessed.
No USB memory is inserted.
The USB memory is being used by
another function.
An existing file name is specified as
the write destination.
The specified file was not found.
The USB memory is full.
The specified file is read-only.

The inserted USB memory cannot


be recognized.
An invalid character was found in a
file name.
File comparison detected a
mismatch.
The entered file number is not
found. The entered number is
greater than the total number of
files.
A value up to 128 can be entered as
the file number.
<1> The specified number indicates
a folder.
<2> An attempt was made to select
a folder in the file list screen.
<1> The file name corresponding to
the specified file number consists
of more than 32 characters.
<2> An attempt was made to select
a file having a file name consisting
of more than 32 characters.

This error occurs due to a USB


hardware failure. An error code is
indicated in parentheses.

This error occurs due to an internal


factor. An error code is indicated in
parentheses.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operation


Message
NOT IN EMG STOP MODE
INVALID SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
DIFFERENCE FOUND
FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY
OTHER FUNCTION
FLASH ROM HEADER ROM
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL
FLASH ROM IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx)

Faulty location/corrective action


Place the system in the emergency
stop state.
Check the program.

Wait until the PMC user completes


processing, then retry.
This file cannot be read. Check the
type of the file.
Retry after ending another function
that uses flash ROM.
Contact us, and report the displayed
message correctly.

Contents
The system is not in the emergency
stop state.
The transfer program is illegal.
A file comparison detected a
mismatch.
Another PMC user is using the flash
ROM.
An attempt was made to read a file,
but its ROM data ID was illegal.
Flash ROM is in use by another
function.
An error due to an internal factor
occurred. Details on the error are
displayed in parentheses.

Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O


operation.
Message
ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER
FORMAT

ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT

UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT

FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER


IS REQUIRED
COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT

I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED


OR IN ERROR STATUS

RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK


THE COMMUNICATION
PARAMETERS
RECEIVED DATA HAS
OVERRUN
OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING
THIS CHANNEL
BAD COMMUNICATION
PARAMETER
OTHER FUNCTION IS USING
I/O FUNCTION

Faulty location/corrective action


Specify a file of the PMC parameter
format. Also, check the specified file
to see whether its content is not
disrupted.
Specify a file of the handy file format.
Also, check the specified file to see
whether its content is not disrupted.
Specify file of recognizable format
such as PMC parameter format, or
check the contents of the file.
Specify file name or file number for
the operation.
Check the communication parameters
such as baud rate, and retry to
communicate.
Check the power of I/O device is ON.
Check the I/O device is connected.
Check the cable that connects I/O
device with PMC is correct one. If
some error has occurred in I/O
device, solve it.
Check the PMC's communication
parameters such as baud rate match
the ones of I/O device.
Check the communication parameters
about flow control.
Use the other channel, or stop the
function.
Check the communication parameters
such as baud rate.
Wait until function that using I/O
function do finish, or stop the function.

- 175 -

Contents
The specified file is not of the PMC
parameter format.

The specified file is not of the handy


file format.
Cannot recognize the format of
specified file.
Need file name or file number to
identify file to read, compare, or
delete.
Communication with the I/O device
has been timeout.
Any I/O device is not connected, or
some error has occurred in it.

Invalid data has been received.

Too many data have received at


once.
Others function is using this channel.
Setting parameters of communication
are not correct.
Another function such as FANUC
LADDER-III is using I/O function.

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST


Message

Faulty location/corrective action

UNKNOWN HANDY FILE


FORMAT DATA

Check the file.

ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING


ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER
ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING
ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING
ILLEGAL WRITE CODE
SETTING
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN
USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION

Set a valid baud rate.


Set a valid channel number.
Set a valid parity bit.
Set a valid stop bit.
Set a valid output code.
Wait until On-line function, do finish
the using I/O function. In general,
both of I/O function and On-line
function should not be used at the
same time.

B-85314EN-1/01

Contents
The received data is not a program of
the PMC system or is a program of
some other incompatible type.
The set baud rate is invalid.
The set channel number is invalid.
The set parity bit is invalid.
The set stop bit is invalid.
The set output code is invalid.
Can not input/output of sequence
program, because On-line function is
using sequence program.

Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during


the I/O operations
Message
ERROR OCCURS IN
SEQUENCE PROGRAM
UNKNOWN DATA TYPE
MUST BE IN EMERGENCY
STOP
PWE MUST BE ON
MUST BE IN EDIT MODE
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT
ALLOWED
PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED
BY OTHER FUNCTION
THIS DEVICE IS USED BY
OTHER FUNCTION
PMC PARAMETER IS
PROTECTED BY OTHER
FUNCTION
LADDER TYPE UNMATCH
TOO LARGE SEQUENCE
PROGRAM
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS
USED BY OTHER FUNCTION
INVALID I/O CONFIGURATION
DATA

Faulty location/corrective action


Check the PMC alarm screen and
correct the indicated program error
accordingly.
Check the file.
Set to emergency stop.
Set the PWE to 1 in NC setting
screen.
Set to the EDIT mode.
Check the related settings.
Retry after terminating the other
function that is currently using the
PMC parameter.
Retry after terminating the other
function that is currently using the
specified device.
Retry after terminating the other
function that is currently using the
PMC parameter.
Specify a program of a valid type.
Check the file. Or, change to a step
number option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
Retry after terminating the other
function that is currently displaying
the ladder program.
Read correct I/O configuration file.

- 176 -

Contents
Data cannot be output because there
is an error in the ladder program.
The PMC type of the input data is
unknown.
The status of NC is not emergency
stop when reading PMC parameter.
The PWE in NC setting screen is 0
when reading PMC parameter.
The mode is not EDIT when reading
PMC parameter.
There are not all the settings that are
needed to use this function.
The PMC parameter is currently used
by some other function and cannot be
referenced by this function.
The specified device is currently used
by some other function and cannot be
used by this function.
The PMC parameter is currently used
by some other function and cannot be
changed by this function.
The specified program is of a different
type and cannot be read.
The ladder program is too large to
read.
The ladder program is currently used
by some other function and cannot be
referenced by this function.
Invalid I/O configuration data was
read and any of the following
operations was performed:
- Writing it to the memory card
- Comparing it with a memory card file
USB
- Writing it to flash ROM
-Comparing it with flash ROM

15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

B-85314EN-1/01

Message
TOO LARGE I/O
CONFIGURATION DATA
I/O CONFIGURATION DATA IS
USED BY OTHER FUNCTION

Faulty location/corrective action


Check the I/O configuration file.
Terminate another function that is
using the I/O configuration data, then
execute operation again.

- 177 -

Contents
The I/O configuration file is too large
to read.
I/O configuration data is being used
by another function (such as FANUC
LADDER-III).

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC


LADDER-III

On the personal computer, custom PMC editing can be performed using the programming system for
sequence program development FANUC LADDER-III.
For the method of operating FANUC LADDER-III, refer to the following manual:
FANUC LADDER-III Operators Manual (B-66234EN)
Use the procedure below when performing custom PMC editing with FANUC LADDER-III.
(1) Backup of a ladder program
From the ROBODRILL, back up a ladder program (PMC2) to be edited.
(2) File conversion/decompilation (MEM file LAD file)
Convert the backed-up ladder program to a file that can be edited using FANUC LADDER-III.
(3) Editing
Edit the ladder program, message data, and so forth.
(4) Compilation/file conversion (LAD file MEM file)
Compile the edited ladder program and convert it to a file that can be loaded into the ROBODRILL.
(5) Loading of the ladder program
Load the ladder program to the ROBODRILL by using a memory card or Handy File.
(When using the multi-language display function, see Appendix D, "MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY
FUNCTION".)

CAUTION
FANUC LADDER-III ver. 6.30 or later is required.
To edit custom PMC for the ROBODRILL using FANUC LADDER-III, set
"exparam" in the %%%FLSET file in the folder in which FANUC LADDER-III has
been installed to "1".
[%%%FLSET file]
;=================================================
;
FANUC LADDER-III Initial Setting File
;
( `key word =' <= 9 characters )
;=================================================
;
*V; ====== System information ======
;

exparam = 1; Set "1"


;
*M; === Mnemonic options definition ===

- 181 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

On the system parameter setting screen of FANUC LADDER-III, confirm that "2 Channel" is checked in
"Selectable I/O Link Assignment".

A.1

CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE

(1) Back up the ladder program of the ROBODRILL from the machine. (See Chapter 11.)
(2) Copy the backed up ladder program onto the hard disk of the personal computer.
(Example: Copy the ladder program into the C:\PMC folder.)
(3) Activate FANUC LADDER-III.

- 182 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

(4) Select [File] [Open].


The Open File window appears.
Set [Files of type] to [All Files (*.*)].
Select the backed up ladder program.
Click the [Open] button.

The following window appears. Click the [OK] button.

(5) Enter the name of a ladder program to be created. (Example: PMC2.LAD)


Select 31i-B PMC for [PMC Type].
Upon completion of setting, click the [OK] button.

- 183 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

(6) The following window appears. Click the [OK] button.

(7) The window below is displayed. Click the [OK] button without entering the password.

(8) Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion of decompilation, the decompilation window is
automatically closed to display the screen below. (Ignore warning W-4105.)

- 184 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

A.2

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

LADDER PROGRAM EDITING

For the method of operation, refer to "FANUC LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234EN)."
Notes and tips on editing are provided below.

A.2.1

Title Editing

The items "Program Designed By", "ROM Written By", and "Remarks" may be used freely.
Do not edit the other items.
(The screen below provides an example of data set by FANUC at the time of shipment.)

- 185 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

A.2.2

APPENDIX

Ladder Editing

Create a ladder program by using P1500 (CUSTOM) as the main program.


Subprograms may be added freely. (P1501 to P5000 may be used.)

- 186 -

B-85314EN-1/01

B-85314EN-1/01

A.2.3

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

Symbol and Comment Editing

Symbols and comments can be freely added to any addresses.


(On the PMC2 ladder editing/reference screen and signal status screen, set symbols and comments
are displayed. However, on the screens common to PMC1 and PMC2 such as the parameter screen,
symbols and comments of PMC1 are used.)

- 187 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

A.2.4

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Message Editing

Do not add messages to addresses other than the specified addresses (A100.0 to A149.7).
The table below indicates the usable alarms and operator messages.

Alarm
Operator message

1900 to 1999
2060 to 2099

[When the multi-language display function is not used]

Messages set here are displayed without modification. When switching the display language, see
Appendix A.5, "EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES".
[When the multi-language display function is used]

See Appendix D, "MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION".

- 188 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

A.2.5

I/O Module Editing

When the standard settings are used, no modification is needed.


Before making additions or modifications to addresses for CH2 (X200-X327/Y200-Y327), fully
understand the specifications to assign the addresses correctly.
I/O Link i has been adopted as an I/O link. When you change the settings, refer to Section 9.10,
"DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O Link i ASSIGNMENT " in "PMC Programming Manual (B64513EN)" or Chapter 15, "CREATION OF I/O Link i ASSIGNMENT DATA" in "FANUC
LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234EN)".

A.2.6

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

System Parameter Editing

You need not edit system parameters usually.


For the method of switching the comment display according to the display language when a ladder
diagram is displayed on the machine screen, see Appendix C, "CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM
COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE".

- 189 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

A.3

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE


CREATION

(1) Select [Tool] [Compile].


The Compile window appears. Select the [Option1-2] tab.

Check the items below as needed then click the [Exec] button:

Output Symbol/Comment

Output First Comment to Output Fourth Comment

Output Netcomment pointers

Multiple use check of Function parameter number

Multiple use check of the symbol address

Output warning in detail

- 190 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

(2) Check that the error count is 0, then click the [Close] button.

(3) Select [File] [Export].


The Export window appears.
Select the file type according to the installation mode of the ladder program.
For a memory card:
[Memory-card Format File]
For a Handy File:
[Handy-file Format File]

After selecting the file type, click the [Next >] button.

- 191 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

(4) Specify the file name of the ladder program to be installed.

After specifying the file name, click the [Finish] button.


(5) When data conversion is complete, the following message appears. Click the [OK] button.

(6) Copy the loading file onto a floppy disk or memory card, then install the file on the ROBODRILL.
(See Chapter 11.)

- 192 -

B-85314EN-1/01

A.4

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION

When creating a custom ladder program with this series by using a custom ladder program created in the
past, note the following:

This series differs in the PMC configuration. So, ladder programs created with the old model must
not be installed without modification.
Even a ladder program created according to the PMC configuration of the new series may not
operate normally when newly added interface signals are used, if the system ladder program version
is earlier. Check whether the interface signals used are usable.
The system ladder program number/version information can be checked on the following
screens:
PMC:
Title data screen
NC: System configuration screen

When a custom ladder program that was created with the old model and has a different program
number/version is to be used with this system, extract only necessary portions to create a new second
PMC ladder program.
An example of procedure for creating a custom ladder program usable with this system by using FANUC
LADDER-III (Version 6.30) from a custom ladder program created with an old ROBODRILL model is
described below.

- 193 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

(1) Open a ladder program created in the past.


Select [File] [Open File].

Select a saved LAD file or MEM file.


When an LAD file is selected, the program list display window is opened. (Proceed to (2).)
When a MEM file is selected, the message below is displayed. Click [OK].

- 194 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

A window for creating a new ladder program is displayed. Enter a desired program name then click
[OK].

The message below is displayed. Click [OK].

Click [OK] without entering the password.

Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automatically


closed. (Ignore warning W-4105 if output.)

- 195 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

(2) The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.

(3) Open a new ladder program to be created. (At the same time, start another FANUC LADDER-III.)
By using the same procedure as described in (1), open a MEM format ladder program backed up
from the machine of this series.

- 196 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

Enter the program name and specify "31i-B PMC" in PMC Type then click [OK].

The message below is displayed. Click [OK].

The window below is displayed. Click the [OK] button without entering the password.

- 197 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automatically


closed.
The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.

- 198 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

(4) Copy the ladder program.


Open subprogram P1500 of the custom ladder program created previously and select the portion
between SUB71 and SUB72 (not including SUB71 and SUB72) then select [Edit] [Copy].
(Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Copy].)

- 199 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Open P1500 of the ladder program to be created newly then move the cursor to the net of SUB72.

- 200 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

Select [Edit] [Paste].


(Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Paste].)

This completes the copying of the ladder program.


The symbols and comments used in the ladder program are also copied.
(5) Connecting messages
See Appendix A.5, "EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES".
(6) Connecting symbols and comments
If necessary symbols and comments are not copied together with the ladder program, create a
mnemonic file containing the symbols and comments from the custom ladder program created
previously.

- 201 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Select [Tool] [Mnemonic Conversion].


Set Mnemonic File (arbitrary), Convert Data (Symbol&Comment), and Selection Item (Full
Options) then click [OK].

Open a mnemonic file containing the created symbols and comments with a text editor and leave
only those symbols and comments that are used with the custom ladder program then save the file.
(Delete those unnecessary symbols and comments that are used with the system.)

- 202 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program.


Select [Tool] [Source Program Conversion].

When only necessary symbols and comments are to be added, "Initialize the following data before
conversion" need not be checked.
(When initializing symbol and comment data, uncheck "Ladder".)
(7) Convert X and Y addresses.
The X and Y addresses may have been changed with each series.
Convert the X and Y addresses to addresses usable with this series according to Chapter 5,
"INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS".
To use the address replacement function, move the cursor to an address to be replaced then select
[Edit] [Replace]. The window below is displayed. Enter an address before replacement in
"Search string" and set an address after replacement in "Replace string" then click [Replace].

- 203 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

If addresses to be replaced are contiguous, select [Edit] [Multi-replace...]. The window below is
displayed. Set the start address of addresses before replacement and the start address of addresses
after replacement with [New Data] then click [Exec]. Those addresses are replaced in a batch.

- 204 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

A.5

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES

When the PMC message multi-language display function is not used, edit messages on the message
editing screen only.
Create messages according to the descriptions below.

A.5.1

Ladder Program Message Editing

Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.

The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator message
numbers, and A addresses.
Alarm
Operator message
A address

1900 to 1999
2060 to 2099
A100.0 to A149.7

- 205 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Add necessary messages.

To switch the message display language without using the multi-language display function, switch the
message by using a ladder program and the interface signals described in Section 12.23. An example of
program is provided below.

To switch the message by using this method, the power must be turned off then back on after
switching the display language.

- 206 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

To use messages created previously, open the ladder program previously created then select [Tool]
[Mnemonic Conversion].
Set Mnemonic File (arbitrary), Convert Data (Message), and Selection Item (Full Options) then click
[OK].

Open a mnemonic file containing the created messages with a text editor and leave only those messages
that are used with the custom ladder program then save the file. (Delete those unnecessary messages that
are used with the system.)

- 207 -

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITING


WITH FANUC LADDER-III

APPENDIX

Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program.


Select [Tool] [Source Program Conversion].
Set the mnemonic file name then click [OK] to incorporate the message data.

- 208 -

B-85314EN-1/01

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

B.1

OVERVIEW

This function can forcibly enter a value for the signal of an arbitrary PMC address. With this function, for
example, an X value can be forcibly entered to enable sequence program debugging without using a
machine, and a Y value can be forcibly entered to enable the signal wiring on the machine to be checked
efficiently without using a sequence program.
There are the following two input modes: Forced input/output mode and override mode. Use either of
these modes according to your purpose. This function is added to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
(1) Forced input/output mode
This mode is applied to all PMC addresses.
However, signals changed by the forced input/output are overwritten when values written or input
by a sequence program are scanned, and therefore the changes made by the forced input/output are
lost.

Machine
I/O addresses
X,Y

Overwrite
Overwrite
Ladder
program

G,F,R,T,K,C,D,E

Overwrite

Example 1:
When forced input/output is applied to R0 in the following ladder program

X0.0
MOVE

1111
1111
K0
R0

(a) The initial signal status is as follows:


X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = 00H
(b) A value of FFH is forcibly input to R0.
X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = FFH
(c) When X0.0 is turned on, R0 indicates the result of input from the sequence program.
X0.0 = on, K0 = 55H, R0 = 55H

- 209 -

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Example 2:
When forced input is applied to X0 in a configuration where I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected
to X0 over an I/O Link
The input value from I/O Unit-MODEL A is transferred to X0 at certain intervals. So, even if
the value of X0 is forcibly modified, X0 is overwritten in the next cycle. Thus, the value of
X0 is restored to the value input from I/O Unit-MODEL A.

1. Input from the machine

I/O Unit-MODEL A

NC

X0 = FFh

X0 = FFh

2. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.

X0 = 00h

3.Input from the machine in the next cycle

I/O Unit-MODEL A

NC

X0 = FFh

The forcibly modified value is


overwritten with the input from the
machine.

X0 = FFh

Cyclical transfer may also be performed for addresses that are not assigned. So, use the
forced input/output function for X in the forced input/output mode to debug a sequence
program when no I/O device is connected or assigned.
When an I/O device is connected, use the override function described below to debug a
sequence program.

- 210 -

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

(2) OVERRIDE mode


The state in which values modified by the forced input/output function cannot be overwritten by a
sequence program or machine signals is referred to as override. In the override mode, override can
be set for any X and Y signals. Forced input/output is applied to those X and Y addresses where
override is not set, and also to addresses other than X and Y.
Example:
In this example, the forced input/output function is applied to X0 in a configuration where the
I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to X0 with an I/O link.

1. Input from the machine

I/O Unit-MODEL A

NC

X0 = FFh

X0 = FFh

2. Override is set for X0.

I/O Unit-MODEL A

NC

X0 = FFh

The value transferred from I/O


Unit-MODEL A is invalidated.
X0 = FFh

3. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.

I/O Unit-MODEL A

X0 = FFh

NC

X0 = 00h

Thus, the forced input function can be used for X addresses in the override mode to debug a
sequence program while an I/O device is connected. When a Y address is placed in the
override state, a value that has been forcibly modified by forced input/output is output to the
I/O device.

- 211 -

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

CAUTION
1. In OVERRIDE mode, input/output signals are updated at 8-ms intervals in sync
with the ladder level. When an I/O link is used which is usually updated at 2-ms
intervals, an input/output signal timing delay occurs. For this reason, note that a
sequence that depends on input/output signal timing may perform an
unpredictable operation.
2. Note that, when OVERRIDE mode is set, the interval of the second level may be
extended slightly.
3. Even if override is set for a Y address, the resultant value of a ladder operation
before modified by forced input/output is displayed as the coil on/off value in
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. A value after modified by the forced
input/output function is output to the I/O device. Note that the on/off indication
on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen does not match a value output to
the I/O device.
Example:
In this example, the forced input/output function is used for Y0.0 in the ladder
below in a onfiguration where the I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to Y0 with
an I/O link. Before OVERRIDE setting, the on/off indication in dynamic display
matches a value output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shown below

I/O Unit-MODEL A

X0.0

Y0.0

(off)

(off)

NC

Y0.0=off

(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)

If 1 is entered forcibly after setting OVERRIDE for Y0.0, the value modified by
the forced input/output function is output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shown
below.

I/O Unit-MODEL A

X0.0

Y0.0

(off)

(off)

NC

Y0.0=on

(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)

WARNING
Special care must be exercised when a signal with the forced input/output
function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the operation of
the machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function when persons are
near the machine.

- 212 -

B-85314EN-1/01

B.2

APPENDIX

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED


INPUT/OUTPUT

Use the procedures below to set the input/output modes.


(1) Operation for enabling FORCING mode
Use the procedure below.
(a) Turn on the power.
(b) Press the emergency stop button.
(2) Operation for enabling OVERRIDE mode
Use the procedure below.
(a) Turn on the power.
(b) Press the emergency stop button.
(c) Set bit 0 of K906 (keep relay) to 1.
(d) Turn the power off and on again while holding down the emergency stop button.

WARNING
Special care must be exercised when modifying a signal with the forced
input/output function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the
operation of the machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function when
persons are near the machine.
CAUTION
1 Upon completion of forced input/output operations, reset keep relay K906#0 to 0.
2 Turning on the power with the emergency stop button released resets keep relay
K906#0 to 0. (The OVERRIDE mode is disabled.)
3 The setting of OVERRIDE is not maintained when the power is turned off. When
the power is turned on again, the setting of OVERRIDE is cleared for X and Y
addresses.
4 Do not force input/output operations for any signal other than those (except the F
address) usable with the custom PMC function.
Never force input/output operations especially for X8.4 (emergency stop) or Y6.1
(Z-axis brake control).

- 213 -

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

B.3

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

SCREEN DISPLAY

On the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the value of a desired signal can forcibly be modified.
On this screen, the following two input modes are available: Forced input/output and override. To
move to the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, click soft key [FORCED I/O] on the SIGNAL STATUS
screen. The following operations can be performed on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen:

*1

Search for a signal: [SEARCH]


Switch to the decimal display and input mode: [DEC]
Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode: [HEX]
Display the SIGNAL STATUS screen: [EXIT]
Turn the signal on: [ON]
Turn the signal off: [OFF]
Set override: [OVRIDE SET] (*1)
Clear override for a signal: [OVRIDE RESET] (*1)
Clear override for all signals: [INIT] (*1)
This soft key is enabled in override mode.

Input mode

Signal status display area

Additional information line

Key input line

Message display line

In the input mode section at the right of the title, "OVERRIDE" is displayed as the mode of the forced
input/output function only in the override mode.
In the signal status display area, the signal status of each address is displayed. For X and Y signals, the
status of each bit for which override is set is displayed as follows.
(1) For an X signal
(Input signal from the I/O device) (Input signal to the ladder program)
In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the input
signals to the ladder program on the right is displayed.

- 214 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

(2) For a Y signal


(Output signal from the ladder program) (Output signal to the I/O device)
In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the output
signals from the ladder program on the left is displayed.

On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error message is displayed when
required.

B.4

OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND


MODIFYING THE VALUES OF SIGNALS

Soft keys on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen


Force input/output
Searches for an address.

Turns the signal on.


Turns the signal off.

Switches to the decimal


input mode.

Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.

Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.

Override
Clears override for a signal.
Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
Turns the signal on.

Searches for an address.

Switches to the
decimal input mode.

Turns the signal off.

Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.

- 215 -

Sets override.

Clears override for all


signals.

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Operations using soft keys


(1) [SEARCH] Search for an address
Searches for a byte or bit address.
(2) [DECIMAL] Switch to the decimal input mode
Switches the contents of the byte to the decimal display and input mode.
This soft key is enabled only when the hexadecimal display and input mode is set.
(3) [HEX] Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode
Switches the contents of the byte to the hexadecimal display and input mode.
This soft key is enabled only when the decimal display and input mode is set.
(4) [EXIT] Switch to the SIGNAL STATUS screen
Terminates the forced input/output function.
(5) [ON] Turn the signal on
Places the signal at the cursor in the on state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending
on the cursor position.
(6) [OFF] Turn the signal off
Places the signal at the cursor in the off state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending
on the cursor position.
(7) [OVRSET] Set override
Places the X or Y address at the cursor in the override state. Operation in bit or byte units is
available depending on the cursor position.
This soft key is enabled only in the override mode.
(8) [OVRRST] Clear override for a signal
Clears the override state of the X or Y address at the cursor. Operation in bit or byte units is
available depending on the cursor position.
This soft key is enabled only in the override mode.
(9) Clear override for all signals
Clears the override state of all X and Y addresses.
This soft key is enabled only in the override mode.

- 216 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION

Screen operations using other keys


(1) INPUT key
Use this key to modify the status of a signal or signals.
(a) Setting in bit units

Enter 1, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the on state.

Enter 0, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the off state.

Just press the INPUT key to invert the on/off state of the signal.
(b) Setting in byte units
At the byte cursor, enter a binary number consisting of up to 8 digits, then press the INPUT key.
(If an entered number is shorter than 8 digits, the number is entered starting from bit 0.)
Example:
When 100 is entered, the number is entered as follows:
Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is on a HEX or DECIMAL field, hexadecimal or decimal input in byte units is
available.
(c) Continuous data input
Continuous data can be entered vertically. The cursor moves at the end of continuously
entered data.

Use a semicolon (;, EOB) as the data delimiter.


Example: "1;0;1" + INPUT key

Use ;= to enter the same value as for the previous data.


Example: "1;=;=;0;=" + INPUT key: 1,1,1,0,0

Use ;; to skip an address.


Example: "1;;1" + INPUT key: Nothing is entered in the second item.

Use "R;input-value;count" to enter the same input value as many times as the specified
number.
Example: "R;1;200" + INPUT key: A value of 1 is entered in the vertical 200 fields.
(2) Cursor keys
Use the cursor keys to select a signal whose value is to be modified.
Pressing the cursor left key when the cursor is at bit 7 of an address changes the cursor to the byte
cursor.
Pressing the cursor right key when the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field of an address
changes the cursor to the byte cursor for selecting the entire 1 byte next to the address.
When the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field or is the byte cursor, the values of the entire 1
byte of the address can be modified.
(3) Page keys
Use the page keys to move the display.

Return key operation


On the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the return key is disabled.
To terminate the forced input/output mode and display the SIGNAL STATUS screen again, use soft key
[EXIT].

- 217 -

C. CUSTOM LADDER
PROGRAM COMMENT
SWITCHING PROCEDURE

C
C.1

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT


SWITCHING PROCEDURE
OVERVIEW

When custom ladder program comment display needs to be switched according to the language setting on
the CNC, set the system parameters according to the procedure below by using FANUC LADDER-III.

C.2

SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING

Use the procedure below to set a comment display language.


(1) Open the custom ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III.
(2) Open the system parameter screen.

- 218 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

C. CUSTOM LADDER
PROGRAM COMMENT
SWITCHING PROCEDURE

(3) Click [Language for Comment]. Next, on the [Language for Comment] dialog box, set comment
set numbers to be displayed on the PMC screen for the CNC display language.
Number of display language
settings (comments)

Displays the first comment


when the CNC display
language is English.
Displays the second comment
when the CNC display
language is Japanese.
Displays the first comment
when the CNC display
language is other than English
and Japanese.

Comment set number


First comment = 0
Second comment = 1
:
Delimit a CNC display language from a
comment set number with a comma.

CNC display language


number

[CNC display language numbers]


0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

English
Japanese
German
French
Chinese (traditional)
Italian
Korean
Spanish
Dutch

9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
-1:

- 219 -

Danish
Portuguese
Polish
Hungarian
Swedish
Czech
Chinese (simplified)
Russian
Other

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION

With this series, the PMC message multi-language display function is available. When compared with
the conventional multi-language display function using the message shift function, the PMC message
multi-language display function has the features indicated below. For details, refer to "FANUC
LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234)".

Alarm message and operator message data is stored in a memory card format different from the
format used for conventional ladder programs, and is loaded into the CNC independently of these
ladder programs.
Multi-language alarm message and operator message data can be defined.
Multi-language settings can be made without dividing A addresses. This means that all A
addresses can be used for each language to define many messages.
When the CNC display language setting is changed, the language for alarm messages and operator
messages is switched without turning off the power of the CNC.

To use the PMC message multi-language display function, use the following procedure:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Create a message file for multi-language display.


Add message data to the main body of the ladder program.
Convert the message data to a memory card format file.
Incorporate the created memory card format file into the CNC.

TIP
Second PMC message files for the multi-language display function to be used
with the custom PMC are not installed on the machine at the time of shipment
from the factory.
To stop the use of the multi-language display function after a second PMC
message file is installed to use the multi-language display function, the second
PMC message file "M2PMCMSG" needs to be deleted. For the procedure of
deletion, see (7) in Section 11.2, "OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN".

- 220 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

D.1

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE


DISPLAY

Create message data by using a text editor on the personal computer.


Here, set message data in a language other than English.
The data format is indicated below.
1.

File format
File type = Text file (*.TXT)
Character code = ANSI/Unicode(UTF-16)
(Identification code)
(Title information)
(Comment between lines)
(Message data 1)
(Message data 2)
(Comment between lines)
(Message data 3)
(Message data 4)
:
(Identification code)

2.

Identification code
An identification code is used to mark the start and end of message data.
Start:
%@4-D
End: %

3.

Title information
Enclose title information in double quotation marks.
Up to 256 half-size characters can be entered. (Title information can be omitted.)

4.

Comment between lines


Enclose a comment between lines in double quotation marks.
No comment between lines is output to a memory card format file.

- 221 -

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION
5.

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Message data

Example)

Language ID

Address

Message character string

$1

%A100.0

1900 COOLANT ALARM

(a) Language ID
Specify a language ID for a message character string with "Dollar($)"+"Language ID".

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

Japanese
German
French
Chinese (Traditional)
Italian

Language ID
7: Spanish
10: Portuguese
15: Chinese (Simplified)
16: Russian

(b) Address
Be sure to prefix % to an address.
The usable addresses are A100.0 to A149.7.
(c) Message character string
Specify an alarm message number at the beginning then specify an alarm message to be
displayed.
An example of message data is given below. ([@0A@] of title information represents a line feed
code.)
%@4-D
" FANUC ROBODRILL D14/21iA SERIES MESSAGE DATA@0A@ EDITION :
0001@0A@ DATE

: 2012/03/29 "

$2 %A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note:

Added alarm)

$2 %A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note:


:

Added operator message)

$10

%A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note:

$10

%A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note:

Added alarm)
Added operator message)

TIP
In this message data file, set messages in a language other than English.
Set English message data as message data for the main body of the ladder
program.

- 222 -

B-85314EN-1/01

D.2

APPENDIX

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF


THE LADDER PROGRAM

Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.

- 223 -

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

Add and edit English messages.


Even when no English message is needed, be sure to set alarm numbers.

The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator message
numbers, and A addresses.
Alarm
Operator message
A address

1900 to 1999
2060 to 2099
A100.0 to A149.7

- 224 -

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

D.3

CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA

D.3.1

Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display

Convert a text file (mnemonic file) containing message data for multi-language display to a memory card
format file.
Open the command prompt screen.

Execute the following at the command prompt (as an example where a file created in Section D.1 is
named PMC2_MSG.TXT):
>C:
>CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3
>FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM

Explanation)
Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed.
(Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.)
Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the mnemonic format message file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) created in
Section D.1 to a second PMC message file (PMC2_MSG.MEM) in the memory card format for
multi-language display that can be loaded with the ROBODRILL.
A message file in the memory card format can be created by creating and executing the following BAT
file:
File name (example): MAKE_MEM.BAT
Contents of a BAT file (example):
C:
CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3
FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM

- 225 -

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

NOTE
1 FPMCMSG.exe is stored in the FANUC LADDER-III installation folder
("C\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3" usually).
2 Usually, the result of command execution is output to the output screen. Use a
"greater than" sign (>) for redirection to a file or printer from the output screen.
3 Line comments other than title information are not output to a memory card
format file.
FPMCMSG is detailed below.
FPMCMSG

[drive:][path]message-file1 [+ [drive:][path]message-file2]
[/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file] [/l=[drive:][path]lad-file]
/o=[drive:][path] mcard-file

[+

Parameters
[drive:][path]message-file1, [drive:][path]message-file2,
Specifies the location and name of a source file of multi-language PMC messages.
Multiple files can be specified using a plus sign (+).
If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.
/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file
A memory card file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally.
For lad-mcard-file, specify the name of a memory card file of a PMC sequence program related to the source file of
multi-language PMC messages.
If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.
This parameter can be omitted.
/l=[drive:][path]lad-file
A LAD file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally.
For lad-file, specify the name of a LAD file related to the source file of multi-language PMC messages.
If the specified LAD file contains no memory card file, the check with this parameter is not performed.
If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.
This parameter can be omitted.
Do not execute this tool when the LAD file specified for /L is open on FANUC LADDER-III.
/o=[drive:][path]mcard-file
Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory card file) to be created.
If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.

D.3.2

Converting the Ladder Program

Compile the ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III to create a memory card format file. For details,
see Section A.3.

- 226 -

B-85314EN-1/01

D.4

APPENDIX

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO


THE CNC

Install two memory card format files created in Section D.3 on the CNC.
For installation of the files on the CNC, two methods are available:

One method writes the files directly to the flash ROM from the boot menu.

The other method reads the files from the I/O screen of the PMC to the memory then writes the files
to the flash ROM.
For details, see Chapter 11, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA".

D.5

CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A


MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE

When editing message data again by using a memory card format message file for multi-language display,
convert data output from the machine, to a mnemonic format file, according to the following procedure:
(1) Back up a ROBODRILL message file for multi-language display from the machine. (See Chapter
11.)
(2) Copy the backed-up message file for multi-language display to the hard disk of the personal
computer.
(Example: Copy the message file to C:\PMC folder.)
(3) Open the command prompt screen.

- 227 -

D. MULTI-LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FUNCTION

APPENDIX

B-85314EN-1/01

(4) Execute the following at the command prompt:


>C:
>CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3
>FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.000 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT

Explanation)
Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed.
(Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.)
Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the memory card format message file (PMC2_MSG.000) to a
mnemonic format file (PMC2_MSG.TXT). (The file name is just an example. Change it to the name
of an actually backed-up message file for multi-language display.)
For repeated conversion, create a BAT file with the contents above.
FPMCMSG is detailed below.

FPMCMSG

[drive:][path]mcard-file
[/unicode]
/o=[drive:] [path]message-text-file

Parameters
[drive:][path]mcard-file
Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory
card file).
If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.
/unicode
Outputs the message character strings to a source file in Unicode.
If this parameter is omitted, the message character strings are output in ANSI.
/o=[drive:][path]message-text-file
Specifies the location and name of a source file.
If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.

(5) With a text editor, open and edit the file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) converted to the mnemonic format.

- 228 -

INDEX

B-85314EN-1/01

INDEX
<A>

<F>

ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL ................120


Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module) ..37
Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel ................22
ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC ........47
AI TOOL MONITOR ..................................................127
ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST.................144
ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY...132
ALARM OUTPUT 2....................................................117
AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL ....................126

FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION....................209


FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL ................106
FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL.............................126

<I>
I/O Communication Error Messages............................172
I/O Link Connection Unit ..............................................22
I/O Module Editing ......................................................189
I/O Unit Model-A...........................................................10
INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT
FILES INTO THE CNC...........................................227
INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA ...............................78
INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS.............................6
INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS..............48
INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS ...........................84
INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION
(OPTION) ................................................................117

<B>
BASIC SIGNALS ........................................................105
BLOCK SKIP...............................................................136

<C>
COMPLETION OF MACHINING ..............................125
CONFIRMATION .........................................................71
CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS.......129
CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................182
CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE
TO A MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE .......................227
CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA ............................225
Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display225
Converting the Ladder Program ...................................226
COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING
COOLANT, CENTER THROUGH COOLANT,
AND AIR BLOW.....................................................125
Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item.......136
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ............................221
CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN
BODY OF THE LADDER PROGRAM ..................223
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT
SWITCHING PROCEDURE ...................................218
CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION...........193
CUSTOM MACROS ...................................................130
CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC
LADDER-III ............................................................181

<L>
Ladder Editing .............................................................186
LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND
LOADING FILE CREATION .................................190
LADDER PROGRAM EDITING................................185
Ladder Program Message Editing ................................205

<M>
M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89).......116
M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ...............................131
MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP....................................132
MACHINE STATUS ...................................................105
MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ..................................124
Message Editing...........................................................188
Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
Screen.......................................................................144
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION ...........220

<N>
NOTES.............................................................................4

<D>

<O>

DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS..71

OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT


SCREEN AND MODIFYING THE VALUES OF
SIGNALS .................................................................215
OPERATION CONTROL ...........................................131
Operation Errors...........................................................157
OPERATION MODE SWITCHING ...........................122
OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN......................81
OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN ....78
OPERATOR'S PANEL................................................121
Optional I/O Module Connection...................................46
OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ......10
OUTLINE ........................................................................1
OVERRIDE CONTROL..............................................133

<E>
EDITING .......................................................................50
EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES65,205
EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS...........................51,53
EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ...................68
ENDING AN EDITING SESSION................................70
EXPLANATION OF TERMS .........................................3
EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..113
EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH
FUNCTION..............................................................110
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH
FUNCTION..............................................................108

i-1

INDEX

B-85314EN-1/01

OVERVIEW .........................................................209,218

<P>
Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are
Used............................................................................46
PMC System Alarm Messages .....................................152
POSITION SWITCH ...................................................128
POWER-OFF ...............................................................132
PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT...............................123

<R>
RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION ..........................117
ROBOT INTERFACE .................................................134

<S>
SCREEN DISPLAY..............................................128,214
SETTING PARAMETERS..........................................143
SETTING PMC PARAMETERS...................................74
SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED
INPUT/OUTPUT .....................................................213
SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS...................................................73
SPECIFICATIONS ..........................................................5
SPINDLE .....................................................................127
STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ......6
STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ...........................50
Switching to the Edit Screen ..........................................51
Symbol and Comment Editing .....................................187
System Parameter Editing ............................................189
SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING............................218

<T>
Terminal Module B ........................................................29
Title Editing .................................................................185
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ....................................118

<U>
USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 137

i-2

REVISION RECORD

B-85314EN-1/01

REVISION RECORD
Edition
01

Date

Contents

Jun., 2012

r-1

B-85314EN-1/01

* B - 8 5 3 1 4 E N - 1 / 0 1 *